WO1983003341A1 - Computerized electro-oculographic (ceog) system - Google Patents

Computerized electro-oculographic (ceog) system Download PDF

Info

Publication number
WO1983003341A1
WO1983003341A1 PCT/US1982/000343 US8200343W WO8303341A1 WO 1983003341 A1 WO1983003341 A1 WO 1983003341A1 US 8200343 W US8200343 W US 8200343W WO 8303341 A1 WO8303341 A1 WO 8303341A1
Authority
WO
WIPO (PCT)
Prior art keywords
output
chair
input
operator
stimuli
Prior art date
Application number
PCT/US1982/000343
Other languages
French (fr)
Inventor
Robert S Ledley
Thomas J Golab
Original Assignee
Ledley, Robert, S.
Golab, Thomas, J.
Priority date (The priority date is an assumption and is not a legal conclusion. Google has not performed a legal analysis and makes no representation as to the accuracy of the date listed.)
Filing date
Publication date
Application filed by Ledley, Robert, S., Golab, Thomas, J. filed Critical Ledley, Robert, S.
Priority to PCT/US1982/000343 priority Critical patent/WO1983003341A1/en
Priority to EP19820901258 priority patent/EP0104166A4/en
Publication of WO1983003341A1 publication Critical patent/WO1983003341A1/en

Links

Classifications

    • A—HUMAN NECESSITIES
    • A61—MEDICAL OR VETERINARY SCIENCE; HYGIENE
    • A61B—DIAGNOSIS; SURGERY; IDENTIFICATION
    • A61B5/00—Measuring for diagnostic purposes; Identification of persons
    • A61B5/24—Detecting, measuring or recording bioelectric or biomagnetic signals of the body or parts thereof
    • A61B5/316—Modalities, i.e. specific diagnostic methods
    • A61B5/369—Electroencephalography [EEG]
    • A61B5/377—Electroencephalography [EEG] using evoked responses
    • A61B5/378—Visual stimuli
    • A—HUMAN NECESSITIES
    • A61—MEDICAL OR VETERINARY SCIENCE; HYGIENE
    • A61B—DIAGNOSIS; SURGERY; IDENTIFICATION
    • A61B5/00—Measuring for diagnostic purposes; Identification of persons
    • A61B5/48—Other medical applications
    • A61B5/4863—Measuring or inducing nystagmus
    • A—HUMAN NECESSITIES
    • A61—MEDICAL OR VETERINARY SCIENCE; HYGIENE
    • A61B—DIAGNOSIS; SURGERY; IDENTIFICATION
    • A61B5/00—Measuring for diagnostic purposes; Identification of persons
    • A61B5/24—Detecting, measuring or recording bioelectric or biomagnetic signals of the body or parts thereof
    • A61B5/25—Bioelectric electrodes therefor
    • A61B5/276—Protection against electrode failure
    • A—HUMAN NECESSITIES
    • A61—MEDICAL OR VETERINARY SCIENCE; HYGIENE
    • A61B—DIAGNOSIS; SURGERY; IDENTIFICATION
    • A61B5/00—Measuring for diagnostic purposes; Identification of persons
    • A61B5/24—Detecting, measuring or recording bioelectric or biomagnetic signals of the body or parts thereof
    • A61B5/316—Modalities, i.e. specific diagnostic methods
    • A61B5/369—Electroencephalography [EEG]
    • A61B5/377—Electroencephalography [EEG] using evoked responses
    • A—HUMAN NECESSITIES
    • A61—MEDICAL OR VETERINARY SCIENCE; HYGIENE
    • A61B—DIAGNOSIS; SURGERY; IDENTIFICATION
    • A61B5/00—Measuring for diagnostic purposes; Identification of persons
    • A61B5/24—Detecting, measuring or recording bioelectric or biomagnetic signals of the body or parts thereof
    • A61B5/316—Modalities, i.e. specific diagnostic methods
    • A61B5/398—Electrooculography [EOG], e.g. detecting nystagmus; Electroretinography [ERG]
    • A—HUMAN NECESSITIES
    • A61—MEDICAL OR VETERINARY SCIENCE; HYGIENE
    • A61B—DIAGNOSIS; SURGERY; IDENTIFICATION
    • A61B5/00—Measuring for diagnostic purposes; Identification of persons
    • A61B5/72—Signal processing specially adapted for physiological signals or for diagnostic purposes
    • A61B5/7203—Signal processing specially adapted for physiological signals or for diagnostic purposes for noise prevention, reduction or removal
    • A61B5/7207—Signal processing specially adapted for physiological signals or for diagnostic purposes for noise prevention, reduction or removal of noise induced by motion artifacts

Definitions

  • the present invention relates to a computerized electro-oculographic system and, more particularly, an integrated system for automated administration of electro-oculographic tests and visual evoked response tests to a patient, and automated processing of results derived from such tests. Automated administration of the tests is conducted either under the direct control of the test administrator via an operator control section (console), or under the automated control of a programmed computer with indirect control by the test administrator.
  • Automated administration of the tests is conducted either under the direct control of the test administrator via an operator control section (console), or under the automated control of a programmed computer with indirect control by the test administrator.
  • electro-oculographic or electro-nystagmographic techniques have been utilized by physicians to gain useful information about a patient with certain complaints -- notably, complaints of disturbed equilibrium.
  • Such information has typically been gained by observing the patient's eye movements during certain kinds of visual and vestibular stimulation.
  • Such observations provide the only physical findings that support a patient's complaint, and they also assist the physician in defining the anatomic location of the patient's disorder.
  • the physician is often able to distinguish between a peripheral vestibular disorder and one located within the central nervous system, and is sometimes able to lateralize a peripheral disorder, or to further localize a central nervous system disorder.
  • Electro-oculography has long been widely used for research purposes in psychology and ophthalmology. It has gradually acquired its more familiar name, electro-nystagmography, because of its extensive application to the study of nystagmus (although it is used to record other types of eye movements as well).
  • electro-nystagmography ENG owes its existence to the fact that the eye is, in effect, a battery, the cornea being a positive pole, the retina being a negative pole, and the potential difference between the two poles being normally at least one millivolt.
  • This electrical potential creates, in the front of the head, an electrical field that changes its orientation as the eyeballs rotate.
  • These electrical changes can be detected by electrodes placed on the skin of a patient, and, when the changes are amplified and used to drive a writing instrument, a trace of the eye position is obtained.
  • electrodes can be arranged on the skin in a number of ways, but a standard technique for clinical purposes involves placement of two electrodes bitemporally (that is, one on the right temple and the other on the left temple) to monitor horizontal eye position, placement of a second pair of electrodes, one above and the other below one of the eyes, to monitor vertical position of the eyes, and placement of an additional electrode, usually on the forehead, to serve as a ground or reference point.
  • two electrodes bitemporally that is, one on the right temple and the other on the left temple
  • placement of a second pair of electrodes one above and the other below one of the eyes
  • an additional electrode usually on the forehead
  • other arrangements of electrodes can be utilized, as are known in the art (for example, an occipital arrangement).
  • a significant problem in the prior art, relating to the monitoring of eye movements using such electrode arrangements, results from the necessity, or at least desirability, of maintaining a constant relationship between the center position of the eye and a given value of the measured electrical parameter (for example, zero volts).
  • the measured electrical parameter for example, zero volts.
  • sustained use of such electrode arrangements and measuring devices results in the development of an offset voltage. That is, the calibration of the measuring device varies so that a center position of the eye no longer results in a reading of zero volts, but rather results in some finite number of volts (referred to as the offset voltage). This has obvious disadvantages with respect to the accuracy of the eye movement measurements.
  • electro-oculograms representing measurement of both horizontal and vertical eye movements -- and occipital measurements as well -- are recorded with the electrodes fixed to the head of the patient.
  • eye movements and visual responses from the patient can be recorded as the patient undergoes one or more tests.
  • a series of six ocular motor, vestibular and response tests are conducted, as follows:
  • Gaze tests wherein eye movements are recorded as the patient looks straight ahead, to the right, to the left, up and down, both with the eyes open and closed.
  • Optokinetic tests wherein eye movements are recorded as the patient watches vertical stripes moving at various speeds to the right, and then to the left, the test being performed both with the patient stationary while the image revolves, and with the patient revolving while the image is stationary.
  • Visual evoked response tests wherein "vision” is assessed, the integrity of the visual pathways (including the optic nerve, optic chiasm, and posterior visual pathways) being analyzed, and the visual evoked response being recorded between occipital electrodes (positioned contralateral to the eye -- i.e., electrodes on the right/left occipital, and electrodes on the right/left ear lobe), as stimulated by a burst of short, high-intensity light pulses, and a reference (ground) electrode (placed on the forehead of the patient).
  • occipital electrodes positioned contralateral to the eye -- i.e., electrodes on the right/left occipital, and electrodes on the right/left ear lobe
  • a reference (ground) electrode placed on the forehead of the patient.
  • one device might be utilized to perform the saccadic test, followed by a period of time during which a second piece of equipment is actuated in order to perform the tracking test, and so forth for the remaining tests.
  • one group of equipment (light flasher or light scanning equipment) might be utilized for administration of the saccadic and tracking tests, and then a second group of equipment (an optokinetic device in combination with a rotating chair) might be utilized to perform the optokinetic test.
  • a second group of equipment an optokinetic device in combination with a rotating chair
  • data obtained as a result of the above-mentioned tests typically include artifacts caused by electronic noise, eye blinks, random eye movements, poor electrode contact, and so forth.
  • minute voltage changes as little as several microvolts per degree of eye displacement
  • distortion of the statistics is a very real problem.
  • offset voltage phenomenon encountered in electrode measuring arrangements of the type employed with such systems is a major contributor to statistical inaccuracy.
  • SAP Software Program developed to analyze, in an off-line mode of operation, the saccadic eye movements previously recorded.
  • Such systems can be equipped with not only a processor and memory, but also various peripheral units (disk drive, magnetic tape drive, graphics display terminal, and hard copy printer). Whereas such systems display the raw data for visual inspection and allow the user to study the data for possible errors in recording and/or digitization, it is important to note that such systems are nevertheless "off-line” systems whereby data is recorded in one operation and then processed in a second operation (on different equipment) separated by a time lapse there-between.
  • Another type of prior art system is that exemplified by the disclosure of a "Method and Apparatus for Brain Waveform Examination" in U.S. Patent No.
  • That patent discloses a method and apparatus for examining the brain waveform of a subject (for example, by electro-encephalographic (EEG) techniques) by providing a stimuli (such as light), and determining a characteristic of a mathematically determinable point in the brain waveforms of the subject (for example, by means of an EEG amplifier, filter, zero-crossing detector and computer).
  • EEG electro-encephalographic
  • the stimulation of the subject can be controlled or varied via a closed-loop feedback path (between, for example, the computer and the photo-stimulator).
  • the system of the latter patent does not comprise an integrated system capable of automated administration of various test stimuli to a patient via employment of an operator control section (console), does not provide for correction of the "offset voltage" phenomenon, and does not expressly provide for automated processing of resultant test data so as to provide critical information to the attending physician or test administrator in acceptable format and in a very short period of time.
  • a computerized electro-oculographic (CEOG) system and, more particularly, an integrated CEOG system having the capabilities of automated administration of various electro-oculographc (EOG) and visual evoked response (VER) tests to a patient in response to operator selection of such tests, immediate on-line recording and display of test results (raw data), rapid and accurate analysis of such raw data in order to provide critical information to the test administrator in an acceptable form and in a very short period of time, and continuous/automatic data processing and "editing" to delete artifacts (typically, caused by electronic noise, eye blinks, random eye movements, poor electrode contact, etc.).
  • EOG electro-oculographc
  • VER visual evoked response
  • the CEOG system of the present invention basically comprises the following components: a patient system, or test unit, including a rotating chair (for use, for example, in the administration of the optokinetic tests), various visual test stimuli devices (such as, for example, an optokinetic device, flasher, and light source), and respective control units for controlling both the rotating chair and the visual test stimuli devices; various input devices (preamplifier, amplifier, and digitizer) for receiving and providing electrode test data to a computer; a computer (including -- for example -- the usual central processing unit, storage media, display/keyboard and hard-copy printer), and an interface unit between the computer and the aforementioned control units and various input devices for facilitating control of test stimuli administration and input of test data, respectively.
  • a patient system or test unit
  • a rotating chair for use, for example, in the administration of the optokinetic tests
  • various visual test stimuli devices such as, for example, an optokinetic device, flasher, and light source
  • respective control units for controlling both the rotating chair and the visual test stimuli devices
  • the integrated CEOG system of the present invention is capable of automated administration of test stimuli to a patient via the provision of an operator control section (console), by means of which the test administrator can select one of various types of stimuli (in accordance with the particular type of test being administrated), and can as well designate various parameters or characteristics of the desired stimuli.
  • the test administrator can operate the operator control section (console) to cause administration of optokinetic tests.
  • the administrator can, in an automated manner, actuate both the rotatable chair (in terms of commanding rotation of the chair and selecting a rotation speed, number of turns for which the chair is to be rotated, etc.) and the optokinetic device
  • the test administrator can operate the CEOG system of the present invention so as to administer, in an automated manner, the saccadic test or the tracking test (in terms of actuating a flasher device or a light scanner, respectively, and designating the scanning speed, scanning pattern, etc.).
  • electrode test data derived from electrodes attached to the head of the patient are, after amplification and digitization, stored in the system processor, the system having the capability of immediate display of the raw data via any one of various conventional display devices (graphic display terminal, hard-copy printer, etc.).
  • the CEOG system of the present invention is unique in that the adverse effects of the typically encountered offset voltage characterizing such electrode test data (which are initially in the form of input voltage signals) can be compensated for by not only manual techniques, but also automated techniques.
  • the CEOG system of the present invention affords the test administrator with an immediate display of the analog test data signals after preamplification, but before amplification, and further provides the test administrator with means for manually adjusting ampli bomb network reference voltages so as to eliminate the "offset voltage" effect by zero-adjusting the amplifiers to achieve zero-volt readings for non-variation of the patient's eyes from a center position.
  • the CEOG system of the present invention provides the test administrator with the selectable option of automatic zero-adjustment by means of the system processor.
  • the CEOG system of the present invention by means of the system processor -- provides immediate, on-line processing of the input test data so as to permit immediate processing and editing of the input test data to delete artificats typically caused by electronic noise, eye blinks of the patient, random eye movements of the patient, poor electrode contact, etc.
  • the inventive CEOG system is able to detect minute voltage changes (of the order, typically, of several microvolts per degree of eye displacement), to amplify them many thousands of times without distortion, and both to record the processed data in memory (for future use) and to display the processed data on a "real time" basis.
  • the inventive CEOG system is, moreover, able to accomplish the above without accepting extraneous signals from the "outside world," and without generating any extraneous signals internally.
  • the inventive CEOG system is able to provide rapid and accurate analysis of data so as to afford the physician with critical information in acceptable format and in a very short period of time.
  • Such provided data typically includes: amplitude, frequency and duration of fast and slow components of nystagmus; maximum, minimum and mean velocity and amplitude of saccades (sychronized jumps made by the eye in moving from one visual target to another in a short period of time); comparison of saccadic amplitude with light jump amplitude; and measurements of the delay between light jump and eye jump.
  • the latter data results from statistical analyses performed by the inventive CEOG system, followed by graphic display of the information resulting therefrom.
  • CEOG computerized electro-oculographic
  • FIG 1 is a diagram representing a broad overview of the CEOG system of the present invention.
  • Figure 2 is a more detailed block diagram of the CEOG system of the invention.
  • Figure 3A is a diagrammatic representation of the preamplifier network 24 of the CEOG system of Figure 2.
  • Figure 3B is a detailed schematic of the preamplifiers A1, A2,..., A6 of the preamplifier network 24 of Figure 3A.
  • Figure 4A is a diagrammatic representation of the amplifier network 26 of the CEOG system of Figure 2.
  • Figure 4B is a detailed schematic of the amplifiers A11, A12,..., A16 of the amplifier network 26 of Figure 4A.
  • Figure 5 is a diagrammatic representation of biasing circuitry 46' contained in the amplifier network 26 of the CEOG system of Figure 2.
  • Figure 6A is a diagrammatic representation of the ADC portion 56' of the converter stage 56 of the CEOG system of Figure 2.
  • Figure 6B is a detailed schematic of one-half of the converter A/D1 of Figure 6A.
  • Figure 6C is a diagrammatic representation of address decoding logic 190 in converter stage 56 of the CEOG system of Figure 2.
  • Figure 6D is a detailed schematic diagram of further ADC logic circuitry 200 and 250 of the converter stage 56 of the CEOG system of Figure 2.
  • Figure 6E is a detailed schematic diagram of the DAC portion 300 of the converter stage 56 of the CEOG system of Figure 2.
  • Figure 7A is a diagrammatic representation of the motor controller 52 of the CEOG system of Figure 2.
  • Figure 7B is a detailed schematic diagram of the fail-safe circuit 326 of Figure 7A.
  • Figure 7C is a detailed schematic of the chair interlock circuitry 328 of Figure 7A.
  • Figure 7D is a detailed schematic diagram of the dynamic braking relay 322 of Figure 7A.
  • Figure 8 is a diagrammatic representation of the relay panel 20 of the CEOG system of Figure 2.
  • Figure 9A is a diagrammatic representation of the operator control section 450 of the control panel 54 of the CEOG system of Figure 2.
  • FIGS 9B through 9E are detailed schematic diagrams of the control panel 54 of the CEOG system of Figure 2.
  • Figures 10A through 100 are detailed logic block diagrams and circuit schematics of the logic section 62 of the CEOG system of Figure 2.
  • Figures 11A through 11D and 11G are detailed logic block diagrams and circuit schematics of the interface 30 of the CEOG system of Figure 2.
  • Figures 11E, 11F and 11H are timing diagrams relating to write (data out), read (data in) and interrupt operations, respectively, as carried out in the interface 30 of the CEOG system of Figure 2.
  • FIGS 12A and 12B are general flowcharts of the test program and analysis program, repectively, implemented by the processor 34 of the CEOG system of Figure 2. Best Mode for Carrying out the Invention
  • FIG. 1 is a diagram representing a broad overview of the CEOG system of the present invention.
  • the CEOG system of the present invention is for use in performing electro-oculographic (EOG) tests and visual evoked response (VER) tests on a subject 2, the subject being positioned within a patient system or test station 4.
  • EOG electro-oculographic
  • VER visual evoked response
  • an electrode junction box 6 is placed on or near the head of the subject 2, and electrodes 6a through 6i connected to junction box 6 are attached to the skin on the head of the subject 2, so as to permit EOG testing;
  • VER testing two pairs of electrodes are connected to the right occipital/right ear lobe, respectively, of the head of the patient, while a fifth electrode 6i is connected to the patient's forehead, as a ground (or reference) electrode.
  • the test station 4 in which the subject is positioned, comprises a rotating chair 8 for rotating the subject 2 (if appropriate for the particular test being administered), the rotation of the chair being controlled by control unit 10.
  • the test station 4 also comprises: a light spot source 12 for generating a light spot; a set of x-y scanning mirrors 14 for receiving and reflecting the light spot so as to cause the light spot to appear on the generally cylindrical walls 18 of the test station 4, the x-y scanning of the mirrors 14 being controllable so as to cause the light spot to move in the x and/or y directions in accordance with a controlled pattern called for by the paticular test; and an optokinetic device or system (a vertical stripe projector) 16 for causing vertical stripe patterns to be projected onto, and to appear on, the cylindrical walls 18 (also as appropriate for the particular test being administered).
  • a light spot source 12 for generating a light spot
  • a set of x-y scanning mirrors 14 for receiving and reflecting the light spot so as to cause the light spot to appear on the generally
  • the light spot source 12, x-y scanning mirrors 14 and optokinetic device 16 are controlled by a relay panel 20, which is itself controlled by control unit 10.
  • electrodes 6a, 6b and 6e, 6f are connected to detect horizontal eye movement of the right and left eyes, respectively, of the subject 2.
  • electrodes 6c, 6d and 6g, 6h are connected to measure vertical eye movement of the right and left eyes, respectively, of the subject 2.
  • a reference electrode 6i is connected in the area of the temple of the subject 2. It is to be understood that other arrangements of the electrodes 6a through 6i can be used, as called for by the particular test being administered.
  • electrodes 6a through 6i are connected in an arrangement typically utilized in the administration of EOG tests, it is to be understood that further electrodes (not shown) can be connected to the subject 2 in an "occipital lobe" arrangement for the administration of VER tests.
  • Electrodes 6a through 6i are connected to preamplifier network 24, the output of the preamplifier network 24 being provided to filters/amplifiers 26.
  • Filters/amplifiers 26 provide analog outputs on respective channels corresponding to respective electrode measurements, and designated as RH (right horizontal), RV (Right vertical), LH (left horizontal), LV (left vertical), RO (right occipital), and LO (left occipital)!
  • the analog outputs from the filters/amplifiers 26 are provided to digitizer 28, which converts the analog signals to corresponding digital signals.
  • the digital signals from digitizer 28 are provided, via computer interface circuit 30, to a computer, generally designated by reference numeral 32.
  • computer 32 comprises a processor 34, responsive to computer programs 36, for processing the digital input test data (that is, the digital outputs of digitizer 28, provided via computer interface 30), and for providing visual display of the test data on display device 38, hard copy recording of test results on hard copy printing device 40, and permanently recorded test data via a peripheral unit such as floppy disk 42.
  • Computer 32 also comprises a keyboard 44 by which operator control of test administration, processing of test results, and output of test results can be achieved.
  • the CEOG of the present invention also comprises auto-calibration (or biasing) circuitry 46 connected to processor 34, by means of which automatic (processor-controlled) biasing of preamplifier network 24 can be achieved. This is in addition to manual biasing of preamplifier network 24. As will be discussed below in more detail, preamplifier network 24 is manually adjusted, and preferably automatically adjusted as well, for proper preamplifier biasing, so as to compensate for the offset voltages of the electrodes 6a through 6i, thereby maintaining zero adjustment of each electrode when the subject's eyes are directed toward a center position.
  • FIG. 2 is a more detailed block diagram of the CEOG system of the invention. Reference numerals previously employed in Figure 1 to designate various elements of the CEOG system have been maintained in Figure 2, where appropriate.
  • the CEOG system of the present invention generally comprises, with reference to Figure 2, a patient system or test station 4 including a revolving chair 8, upon which the subject 2 is seated -- typically during VER and EOG testing.
  • the chair 8 is rotated by a motor 50, driven by a motor controller 52 connected to a power source (such as 110 volts, 60 Hz.).
  • the motor controller 52 is, in turn, controlled by input control signals received from control panel 54 in control unit 10.
  • various output status signals (to be discussed below) from motor 50
  • Electrode test data derived from electrodes 6a-6i ( Figure 1) attached to the subject 2 ( Figure 2) are provided, via preamplifier network 24 and amplifier network 26, to analog-to-digital converters (ADC) contained in converter stage 56. Digital representations of the electrode test data are derived therein, and are provided as an input DATA to processor 34 via EOG interface 30.
  • a signal monitor scope 58 for displaying, to the operator, the electrode test data signals as generated by preamplifier network 24.
  • the operator of the CEOG system is able to perform manual bias adjustment of preamplifier network 24, by which broad-range biasing of preamplifier network 24 (to compensate for the voltage offset of the electrodes) can be accomplished easily and quickly.
  • a preferred embodiment of the CEOG system includes a selector switch 59, by which the operator can select test data signals from a particular pair of electrodes for display on the scope, thus achieving individual bias adjustment of each respective preamplifier (corresponding to a selected pair of electrodes).
  • processor 34 as a result of processing the received digital test data, DATA -- provides an output BIAS (via interface 30, converter stage 56, and amplifier network 26) to preamplifier network 24.
  • preamplifier network 24 is automatically biased so as to provide continuous/automatic compensation for the offset voltage of the electrodes.
  • Control panel 54 serves as a power distribution/junction box for distributing power throughout the system. Specifically, control panel 54 is powered by a 110 volts, 60 Hz. power input, and provides this A.C. power to power supply 60 which, in response thereto, provides necessary D.C. voltages (+5 v., +12 v., +15 v., -15 v., etc.) to the various elements of the system, as needed. Control panel 54 also receives the various D.C. power inputs from power supply 60, and distributes such D.C. power inputs throughout the system. Thus, as illustrated in Figure 2, power outputs PWR are provided by control panel 54 to preamplifier network 24, amplifier network 26, converter stage 56 and logic section 62, among others.
  • Control panel 54 also serves the function of distributing various logic control signals throughout the system.
  • motor controller 52 -- which controls rotation of the chair -- receives control signals from control panel 54, such control signals originating in logic section 62 and processor 34. More specifically, control panel 54 provides control signals which, as will be seen below, command the motor controller 52 to control the motor 50 in such a manner that the chair 8 will commence revolution on command, will revolve at a given (commanded) speed S, will stop after one turn, after a series of turns, or on command, and will automatically restart revolution in the opposite direction.
  • Control panel 54 also receives and distributes various status signals, such as a chair position indication signal and chair turn information provided by chair 8 via motor 50 motor controller 52. Such status signals are provided to logic section 62 and interface 30.
  • motor 50 and motor controller 52 transmit, to control panel 54, status signals defining tachometer information (relating to the actual speed of the rotating chair 8) , position information relating to the position of the chair 8 relative to a starting position, and turn information relating to the detection of completion of each chair rotation, as detected by a positon detector circuit (not shown in Figure 2 but to be discussed further below).
  • Control panel 54 also operates, in a manner to be described in more detail below, with relay panel 20 so as to control test stimuli, and thus the administration of tests to the subject 2, via control of light spot source 12 and x-y scanning mirrors 14, optokinetic device 16 (stripe cage 76), and flasher 70.
  • relay panel 20 controls the usage of a light spot source 12 (such as a laser) which operates in conjunction with a shutter 66 and x-y scanning mirrors 14 to provide test stimuli comprising a light spot which moves in accordance with a pre-programmed pattern corresponding to desired test stimuli for the particular test being administered (e.g., EOG tracking).
  • Light spot source (or laser) 12 is preferably a Metrologic Laser, Model No. ML-600 or ML-620 (manufactured by Metrologic Instrument, Inc.).
  • the shutter 66 -- which is a mechanism used to block the laser beam (rather than turning on and turning off the laser beam, which could be detrimental to the laser) -- is preferably implemented by a solenoid (Model No.
  • the x-y scanning mirrors 14 are preferably implemented by the following equipment (manufactured by General Scanning, Inc. of Watertown, Massachusetts): a Series XY-300 Scanning Assembly, two G-330 Galvanometers, an X-7 Mount, and an A-102 Driver Amplifier.
  • relay panel 20 controls a motor 68 which is used to raise and lower a flasher 70, thus placing flasher 70 in position with respect to the subject 2 for the purpose of administering a "flashing light” (VER) test.
  • the flasher 70 is controlled by photostimulator 72 which, in turn, is controlled by the processor 34 via logic section 62 and interface 30.
  • the flasher 70 is preferably implemented by a Photostimulator device, Model PS22 (manufactured by Grass Medical Instruments of Quincy, Massachusetts).
  • the relay panel 20 controls the optokinetic device 16, consisting of a motor 74 which is used to raise and lower a stripe cage 76, such optokinetic device 16 being utilized (for example) in the administration of EOG tests to the subject 2.
  • Figure 3A is a diagrammatic representation of the preamplifier network 24 of the CEOG system.
  • the preamplifier network 24 -- as previously mentioned -- is preferably located in the electrode junction box 6 ( Figure 1). Each of the electrodes 6a through 6i is connected to the preamplifier network 24.
  • preamplifier network 24 of Figures 1 and 2 basically comprises, with reference to Figure 3A, amplifiers A1 through A6, each corresponding to a specific pair of electrodes 6a/6b, 6c/6d, ... connected to the subject 2.
  • Preamplifier network 24 comprises individual preamplifiers A1, A2,..., A6 for receiving input test data signals from corresponding pairs of electrodes, and for providing corresponding preamplifier outputs PREMP1, PREMP2,..., PREMP6 to the amplifier network 26 ( Figure 2).
  • Preamplifiers A1, A2,..., A6 also receive zero-adjustment inputs ZRADJ1, ZRADJ2,..., ZRADJ6, resulting from manual bias adjustment by the operator or automatic bias adjustment under the control of the processor 34 ( Figure 2), as will be discussed below relative to Figure 5.
  • electrode test data signals for a particular eye measurement for example, left vertical eye measurement
  • preamplifier A1 a preamplifier output is provided (specifically, the preamplifier output of preamplifier A1 is provided as signal PREMP1 via terminal A thereof).
  • Zero adjustment signals (such as ZRADJ1 corresponding to bias adjustment of preamplifier A1) are received and provided to terminal 2 of the particular preamplifier to be adjusted (in this case, preamplifier A1).
  • ZRADJ1, ZRADJ2,... are zero adjustment signals (previously referred to, in Figure 2, as BIAS signals) received either from amplifier network 26 (in the case of manual bias adjustment) or from processor 34 via the DAC contained in converter stage 56 and the interface 30 (in the case of automatic bias adjustment). This subject will be addressed in further detail below.
  • Power signals (previously referred to as PWR in Figure 2) -- specifically, +15 volts D.C, -15 volts D.C, and a ground signal GND -- are provided to terminals F, E and H, respectively, of the various preamplifiers A1 through A6 as power inputs thereto, terminal K of each preamplifier A1 through A6 being grounded.
  • the preferred embodiment includes input/output connector terminals 102 connected by coaxial cable to respective preamplifiers A1-A6, as shown in Figure 3A for preamplifier A1 alone.
  • terminal B of each preamplifier A1-A6 is preferably connected in common to the outer shield of the coaxial cable. This common ground connection arrangement significantly aids common mode rejection, thus eliminating a substantial amount of normally encountered system noise.
  • Figure 3B is a detailed schematic of the preamplifiers A1, A2,..., A6 of the preamplifier network 24 of Figure 3A.
  • preamplifiers A1, A2,..., A6 each comprise an amplifier AMP1, which -- in the preferred embodiment -- is an AD522 amplifier (manufactured by Analog Devices of Massachusetts).
  • Amplifier AMPl receives electrode test data signals via terminals L and 10. Such electrode test data signals are applied to terminals 1 and 3, respectively, of amplifier AMPl.
  • Diodes CR1 and CR2 provide amplifier AMP1 with protection from "static discharge.”
  • Capacitors C7 and C8 are provided between terminal L and ground, and terminal 10 and ground, respectively, for the purpose of removing high frequencies occurring in the electrode test data signals.
  • Grounding resistors R13 and R14 -- provided between terminals L and 10, respectively, and ground -- are preferably five megohm resistors which drain off leakage currents from amplifier AMP1 before the electrodes are "plugged in.” If this is not done, a voltage (as much as ⁇ 15 volts) could accumulate on capacitors C7 and C8, which would cause the patient to receive a shock through the electrodes.
  • Amplifier AMP1 also has an external gain-setting resistor R8 connected between terminals 2 and 14 thereof.
  • Variable resistance P1 is an offset null potential which is adjusted to provide zero volts at terminal 7 of amplifier AMP1 when the inputs (at terminals 1 and 3 thereof) are “shorted.”
  • a further supply voltage -V EE is provided to amplifier AMP1 (at terminal 5 thereof).
  • each amplifier A1, A2,..., A6 of preamplifier network 24 may be zero-adjusted by means of respective inputs ZRADJ1, ZRADJ2, — , ZRADJ6.
  • Input ZRADJi is derived from circuitry 46' of Figure 5 (to be discussed below).
  • An input capacitor C9 is provided for the purpose of removing noise from the input signal ZRADJi.
  • Amplifier AMP2 is provided with a feedback RC network, consisting of capacitor C10 (which also removes noise) and resistor R11 connected in parallel between output terminal 6 and input terminal 2 of amplifier AMP2.
  • Supply voltages +V CC and -V EE are supplied to terminals 7 and 4, respectively, of amplifier AMP2, and biasing capacitors C11 and C12 are connected between respective terminals 7 and 4 (of amplifier AMP2) and ground.
  • Circuits 100 and 102 consist of RC networks (resistor R1 and capacitors C1 and C3 in the case of circuit 100, and resistor R2 and capacitors C2 and C4 in the case of circuit 102).
  • the latter RC circuits operate on -15 volt and +15 volt inputs, respectively, to derive the supply voltages -V EE and +V CC , respectively, while at the same time accomplishing noise decoupling.
  • FIG. 4A is a diagrammatic representation of the amplifier network 26 of the CEOG system.
  • Amplifier network 26 comprises a plurality of amplifiers A11, A12,..., A16 for receiving respective preamplifier output signals PREMP1, PREMP2,..., PREMP6, as shown.
  • Amplifiers A11,..., A16 amplify the aforementioned respective preamplifier output signals, and provide amplifier output signals AMPOUT1,
  • AMPOUT2,... , AMPOUT6 corresponding to the electrode test data signals for left vertical eye movement, right vertical eye movement, left horizontal eye movement, right horizontal eye movement, left occipital movement and right occipital movement, respectively.
  • the outputs AMPOUT1,..., AMPOUT6 are provided to converter stage 56 ( Figure 2).
  • the inputs PREMP1, PREMP2,..., PREMP6 are also provided to selector switch 59 which, as shown in Figure 4A, selects (by operator actuation of the switch) a particular preamplifier output for display on the scope 58.
  • selector switch 59 which, as shown in Figure 4A, selects (by operator actuation of the switch) a particular preamplifier output for display on the scope 58.
  • This facilitates broad-range bias adjustment of the preamplifier output signals by affording the operator a visual display of the preamplifier outputs, and thus immediate visual display of the results of the bias adjustment action taken by the operator.
  • scope 58 is preferably a B&K PRECISION Oscilloscope, Model No. 1403A (manufactured by DYNASCAN Corporation of Chicago, Illinois).
  • Figure 4B is a detailed schematic of the amplifiers A11, A12,..., A16 of the amplifier network 26 of Figure 4A.
  • network 120 comprises a series of RC circuits made up of resistor R3 in series with capacitor C5, and resistor R5 in series with capacitor C6, such RC networks being provided for the purpose of filtering the inputs PREMPj .
  • Diodes CR1 and CR2 in input network 120 correspond in function to the similarly designated diodes of the preamplifiers Ai ( Figure 3B).
  • Capacitors C7 and C8 correspond to the similarly designated capacitors in Figure 3B, and provide the function of high frequency removal during test administration.
  • Resistors R13 and R14 correspond to similarly designated grounding resistors in Figure 3B.
  • resistors R3 and R4 can be replaced by capacitors.
  • gain-setting resistor R8 connected at terminals 2 and 14 of amplifier AMP3
  • supply voltages +V CC and -V EE are provided at terminals 8 and 5, respectively, of amplifier AMP3.
  • External adjustment of amplifier AMP3 is provided via variable resistor
  • FIG. 5 is a diagrammatic representation of biasing circuitry 46' contained in the amplifier network 26 of Figure 2.
  • Figure 1 discloses auto-calibration circuitry 46, responsive to the processor 34, for adjusting offsets of individual amplifiers within the preamplifier network 24, in the preferred embodiment of the invention, such auto-calibration functions originate in biasing circuitry in amplifier network 26 ( Figure 2).
  • biasing circuitry 46' basically comprises a plurality of potentiometers POT1,..., POT6 for manual adjustment of the bias of individual amplifiers in preamplifier network 24 ( Figure 2), via generation of outputs ZRADJ1,..., ZRADJ6.
  • Such manual adjustment of individual amplifiers A1,..., A6 of preamplifier network 24 ( Figure 3A) occurs, in the preferred embodiment, when a bias select switch -- comprising ganged switches S1,..., S6 -- is in either the AUTO or MANUAL positions.
  • Automatic adjustment of individual amplifiers in preamplifier network 24 is achieved when ganged switch S1,..., S6 ( Figure 5) is in the AUTO position.
  • automatic adjustment input signals BIAS1-BIAS6 are received from converter stage 56 ( Figure 2), and such signals BIAS1-BIAS6 contribute, via respective resistors R21-R26, to the generation of zero-adjustment currents ZRADJ1-ZRADJ6.
  • the operator of the inventive CEOG system is able to manually adjust the offset voltage of the individual amplifiers in preamplifier network 24 ( Figure 2) via adjustment of particular potentiometers (POT1, POT2, etc.).
  • POT1, POT2, etc. particular potentiometers
  • This enables the operator of the CEOG system to perform broad-range biasing of particular amplifiers -- e.g., amplifiers associated with left vertical eye movement, right vertical eye movement, etc. -- and thus, to achieve, via such broad-range biasing, elimination of almost all of the D.C. offset voltage associated with the corresponding electrodes attached to the head of the subject.
  • the CEOG system of the present invention also provides automatic, narrow-range biasing of the individual amplifiers in preamplifier network 24 ( Figure 2).
  • Such automatic, narrow-range biasing of the individual amplifiers in the network 24 is achieved by generation, in processor 34 ( Figure 2) of BIAS signals, such BIAS signals being provided -- via interface 30 and converter stage 56 -- to the biasing circuitry 46' ( Figure 5).
  • Such BIAS inputs (BIAS1, BIAS2, ...) contribute to output adjustment signals ZRADJ1, ZRADJ2, etc., and elimination of the remainder of the D.C. offset voltage associated with the corresponding electrodes is thus automatically achieved.
  • Figure 6A is a diagrammatic representation of the ADC portion 56' of the converter stage 56 of Figure 2.
  • the ADC portion 56' of converter stage 56 ( Figure 2) includes a plurality of ADC's -- designated A/D1, A/D2 and A/D3 -- for receiving pairs of analog electrode test data input signals AMPOUT1/AMPOUT2, AMPOUT3/AMPOUT4 and AMPOUT5/AMPOUT6, respectively, from amplifiers A11, A12,..., A16, respectively, of amplifier network 26 ( Figure 4A), and for converting these analog inputs to respective digital outputs DAT0-DAT9.
  • converters A/D1-A/D5 are clocked by a timing clock input SAMPLE, and this causes each converter to convert its respective analog input signal (AMPOUT1, AMPOUT2, etc.) to a 10-bit digital word which is stored in an internal buffer in the particular converter A/D1-A/D5. Then, upon generation of inputs , and by the computer processor 34 ( Figure 2), converters A/D1-A/D5 gate the data from the internal buffer onto the output channel, at the appropriate time, constituting the digital output DAT0-DAT9.
  • the ADC portion 56' includes a further converter A/134 for receiving and converting, to digital form, analog signals TACH2 (relating to the speed of motor 50 ( Figure 2) which drives the chair 8, and STRIPESPD (relating to the speed of the motor 74 which drives the stripe cage 76 in optokinetic device 16 ( Figure 2)).
  • the ADC portion 56' of Figure 6A includes an additional converter A/D5 for receiving and converting, to digital form, analog signals POSX and POSY (relating to the X and Y positions of the mirrors 14 ( Figure 2)).
  • Analog signal TACH2 is provided to converter stage 56 by motor controller 52, via control panel 54 and logic section 62 ( Figure 2); analog signal STRIPESPD is provided by control panel 54 directly to converter stage 56; and analog signals POSX and POSY are provided by relay panel 20 to converter stage 56 via control panel 54 and logic section 62 ( Figure 2).
  • each converter A/D1-A/D5 receives an input SAMPLE which causes the commencement of the conversion of analog data to digital form. When all conversions are complete, output DATRDY is generated as an output. These two control signals will be discussed further below.
  • Figure 6B is a detailed schematic of one half of the converter A/D1 of Figure 6A. It is to be understood that the other half of converter A/D1 is identical in structure to the first half shown in Figure 6B. Moreover, it is to be further understood that each converter A/D2-A/D5 is identically configured to converter A/D1.
  • Converter A/D1 that is, each half thereof -- basically comprises sample and hold circuit 150, ADC device 154, and buffers 158 and 160.
  • Sample and hold circuit 150 comprises amplifiers 166 and 168, and AND gate 170, configured as shown.
  • Sample and hold circuit 150 is preferably an AD582 device (manufactured by Analog Devices).
  • ADC device 154 is a conventional analog-to-digital converting device, but is preferably an AD571 device (manufactured by Analog Devices).
  • buffers 158 and 160 include tristate amplifiers 172 through 177 and AND gate 178, configured as shown. That is to say, when the output of gate 178 is “low,” the outputs of amplifiers 172 through 177 are open circuits; when the output of gate 178 is “high,” the outputs of amplifiers 172, 173,... are the same as input signals B1, B2,... from ADC154.
  • buffers 158 and 160 are hex/tristate buffers, Model Nos. SN74LS365 or SN74365 (manufactured by Texas Instruments).
  • output AMPOUT1 is received from amplifier network 26 ( Figure 2) by sample and hold circuit 150.
  • Signal DATRDY is normally "high”
  • signal SAMPLE is normally "low.”
  • ADC device 154 performs digital conversion of the analog input AMPOUT1 in response to receipt of signal SAMPLE from ADC logic circuitry 200 going “low” ( Figure 6D), to be discussed below. During the digital conversion process, ADC holds output to the “high” condition, thus making DATRDY “low.” Once conversion is completed, however, ADC device 154 generates a "low” output . It is to be noted that, in order for output DATRDY to go "high,” each of the two ADC devices 154 in each converter A/D1,...,
  • A/D6 must generate a "low” output at terminal . This will allow the output DATRDY (subsequently provided to ADC logic circuitry 200 ( Figure 6D)) to go “high.”
  • Digital bit outputs B1 through B6 are provided to respective tristate buffers 172 through 177 in hex buffer 158, while digital bit outputs B7 through B10 are provided to corresponding buffers (not shown) in buffer 160.
  • buffers 172 through 177 of buffer 158 (and corresponding buffers (not shown) in buffer 160) are of the type that look like an open circuit at the output until receipt of a clock-type signal.
  • processor 34 ( Figure 2) provides address input signals to ADC address decoding logic 190 ( Figure 6C), which generates clock-type signals , (as will be explained in detail below).
  • ADC address decoding logic 190 Figure 6C
  • clock-type signals as will be explained in detail below.
  • buffers 158 and 160 which transmit the buffered digital bit data, via interface 30, to processor 34 ( Figure 2), as outputs DAT0 through DAT9.
  • Figure 6B is a detailed schematic of one half of converter A/D1 of Figure 6A, and further, that each of converters A/D2-A/D5 are configured identically to converter
  • A/D1-A/D5 release their digital output DAT0-DAT9 in response to respective clock-type inputs (see Figure 6A), while the second halves of converters A/D1-A/D5 release digital data DAT0-DAT9 in response to respective clock-type inputs
  • Figure 6C is a diagrammatic representation of address decoding logic 190 in converter stage 56 of Figure 2.
  • logic 190 basically comprises binary/octal decoder circuits 192, 194 and 196. Principal inputs to the logic 190 are address inputs ADDR1, ADDR2 and ADDR3 , and further inputs and
  • Binary/octal decoder 192 responds to receipt of signal inputs (acting as a decoding clock signal) and inputs ADDR1-ADDR3 to perform octal conversion, selectively actuating one of the eight outputs through in correspondence to the particular decoder input. In this manner, previously discussed clock-type outputs, STROB10-STROB17, are obtained. STROB10-STROB17 are, it will be recalled, clock-type signals provided to respective converter devices A/D1, A/D2, in the ADC portion 56' of converter stage 56 (see Figure 6A) .
  • binary/octal decoder 194 responds to receipt of signal inputs and ADDR1-ADDR3 to perform octal conversion, thus actuating a selected one of the outputs through in correspondence to the particular decoder inputs.
  • clock-type outputs STROB20-STROB27 are obtained, and these clock-type outputs (as will be discussed subsequently) are utilized in the DAC portion of the converter stage 56 ( Figure 2).
  • binary/octal decoder 196 responds to receipt of signal inputs and ADDR1-ADDR3 to perform octal conversion, thus actuating a selected one of the outputs Q0 through Q7 in correspondence to the particular decoder inputs.
  • clock-type outputs STROBMX and STROBMY are obtained, and these clock-type outputs (as will be discussed below) are utilized as clock-type inputs to the DAC circuitry 300 ( Figure 6E).
  • decoder 196 ( Figure 6C) generates clock-type outputs and which are clock-type inputs provided to A/D5 ( Figure 6A).
  • binary/octal decoders 192, 194 and 196 are preferably SN74LS42 converter circuits (manufactured by Texas Instruments).
  • Figure 6D is a detailed schematic diagram of further ADC logic circuity 200 and 250 of the converter stage 56 of Figure 2.
  • Logic circuitry 200 consists of a timer 202 (preferably, a one-second timer) which responds to
  • Logic 250 basically comprises NAND gate 252 and one-shot devices 254 and 256.
  • NAND gate 252 detects the occurrence of either input (a one-bit (specifically, bit number 14) input from interface 30 of Figure 2) or (an input from logic section 62 of Figure 2 ) , and triggers the one-shot device 254 to provide output SAMPLE, transmitted to the ADC device 154 in each converter A/D1-A/D5 ( Figures 6A and 6B).
  • the trailing edge of signal SAMPLE causes each ADC device 154 to start the conversion process.
  • processor 34 transmits -- via interface 30 -- appropriate decoder inputs (or or ), and ADDR1-ADDR3, as a result of which address decoding logic 190 ( Figure 6C) issues appropriate clock-type outputs (any one of ) so as to cause the digital data to be transmitted to the processor 34 by the appropriate converter A/D1,..., A/D5 ( Figure 6A) .
  • Figure 6E is a detailed schematic diagram of the DAC portion 300 of the converter stage 56 of Figure 2.
  • the DAC portion 300 comprises latch circuits 302 and 303, DAC device 306, and associated amplifier 308.
  • latch circuits 302 and 303 are reset by input applied to the R terminals of each. Then, in response to a clock-type input applied to the CK terminals thereof, each of latch circuits 302 and 303 receives and latches digital data DTOA6-DTOA9 and DTOA0-DTOA5, respectively, from the processor 34 ( Figure 2) applied thereto.
  • latch circuits 302 and 303 are preferably 74LS174 latch devices (manufactured by Texas Instruments).
  • DAC device 306 is preferably an AD561J converter device (manufactured by Analog Devices of Massachusetts). Accordingly, DAC 306 is provided with supply voltages V CC and V EE (+5 and -15 volts, respectively). The gain and bias of the outputs of the DAC device 306 are externally set by potentiometers P1 and P4, respectively.
  • amplifier 308 is preferably a UA741 amplifier (manufactured by Analog Devices of Massachusetts). Accordingly, amplifier 308 is supplied with +15 volt and -15 volt supply voltages. Whereas analog output ANALOUT is provided to terminal 2 of amplifier 308, the terminal 3 thereof is connected to ground via grounding resistor R1. Moreover, the output of amplifier 308 -- besides being connected in a "feedback" arrangement to the DAC device 306 (via potentiometer P1) -- is also feedback-connected to its terminal 2 input via feedback capacitor C5. Finally, amplifier 308 is provided with bypass capacitors C6 and C7.
  • the DAC circuitry 300 preferably includes an additional pair of latch circuits, an additional DAC device, and an additional amplifier, so as to provide dual-channel outputs.
  • processor 34 ( Figure 2) provides digital signals DTOA0-DTOA9 ( Figure 6F) -- via latch circuits 302 and 303 -- to DAC device 306, wherein analog conversion takes place.
  • the resulting analog output ANALOUT -- after current-to-voltage conversion in amplifier 308 -- provides an output voltage signal BIASN.
  • Figure 7A is a diagrammatic representation of the motor controller 52 of the CEOG system.
  • Motor controller 52 basically comprises a linear servo controller 320, a dynamic breaking relay 322, tach (motor speed) buffer 324, brake command input (fail safe) circuitry 326, and chair interlock circuitry 328.
  • linear servo controller 320 receives a control signal MTRSPD, provided by control panel 54 ( Figure 2), but originating in logic section 62 as a result of operator selection.
  • Linear servo controller 320 also receives a tachometer input signal TACHIN from tachometer 51 associated with the motor 50 ( Figure 2), indicating actual speed of the motor 50.
  • Linear servo controller 320 then performs, in a conventional manner, a comparison operation of actual motor speed (TACHIN) with desired motor speed (MTRSPD), and -- as a result of such comparison -- controller 320 generates appropriate motor-controlling current (LOADLO/LOADHI ) signals.
  • the motor-controlling currents are provided through dynamic braking relay 322 to motor 50 so as to control the speed of operation thereof by increasing or decreasing the speed of the motor 50, and thus the rotational speed of the chair 8 ( Figure 2).
  • Tachometer input signal TACHIN provided to linear servo controller 320 is also provided to tach buffer 324, from which analog signal TACH2 is provided to the ADC portion 56' of converter stage 56 ( Figures 2 and 6A) for subsequent digital conversion, and provision to processor 34 via interface 30. In this manner, the processor 34 is kept apprised of the actual speed of the motor-driven chair 8.
  • Tach buffer 324 can be any conventional buffer amplifier, as is well known to one of ordinary skill in the art.
  • Linear servo controller 320 also receives -- at terminals 4 and 6 thereof -- respective brake command signals BRK6 and BRK8, these brake command signals being provided by fail safe circuitry 326.
  • Linear servo controller 320 responds to the brake command input signals BRK6 and BRK8 in a conventional manner to force the motor-controlling current from controller 320 to zero during the braking operation.
  • input signals BRK6 and BRK8 are outputs of the fail safe circuit 326, which circuit 326 receives inputs BRK1 and from control panel 54 ( Figure 2).
  • Figure 7B is a detailed schematic diagram of the fail-safe circuit 326 of Figure 7A.
  • Input signal BRK1 is received from logic section 62 ( Figure 2) via control panel 54, and is always maintained at a "high” level (for example, +5 volts). Input signal is normally maintained “high,” so that solenoid 362 is non-actuated, and switch 364 is normally closed. This forces controller 320 ( Figure 7A) to put out zero amps at the LOADLO/LOADHI outputs thereof.
  • linear servo controller 320 when goes “low,” solenoid 362 is actuated, causing normally closed switch 364 to open, and the open-circuited inputs BRK6 and BRK8 to linear servo controller 320 ( Figure 7A) cause linear servo controller 320 to adjust the speed of motor 50 so as to bring actual motor speed (TACHIN) into coincidence with desired motor speed (MTRSPD).
  • FIG 7C is a detailed schematic of the chair interlock circuitry 328 of Figure 7A.
  • chair interlock circuit 328 comprises resistor 330, transient diode 332 and solenoid K1 -- arranged as shown in Figure 7C -- and connected, as shown, both to A.C. power switches 338 and 340 ( Figure 7A), and to seat belts 334 (located on the chair 8 ( Figure 2)).
  • switch S 2 the chair motor "on” switch which, as will be seen below, is located on an operator control section of control panel 54 of Figure 2 causes application of a positive D.C. voltage to solenoid K1 via resistor 330, solenoid K1 actuating A.C.
  • Motor controller 52 further includes position detection circuitry 336 which, in actual implementation, is located on the chair 8 ( Figure 7A) .
  • the chair 8 is equipped with a reflective plate 350 which reflects light received from lamp 352 (actuated by a voltage +POSLIT), causing the reflected light to impinge on photodetector 354 so as to generate chair position information POSDET, which information passes through motor controller 52 and control panel 54 ( Figure 2) to logic section 62.
  • Signal POSDET indicates that the chair 8 is at a position 90 degrees to the right of its "normal" position.
  • Motor controller 52 ( Figure 7A) also includes a start limit switch 356 (normally open) which, in actual implementation, is located on the chair 8 ( Figure 7A).
  • start limit switch 356 upon operator reset of the system, if start limit switch 356 is open, as indicated by a "high” STRLIM signal, the chair 8 will automatically, under system control, move to its "normal” position, which is attained when the limit switch 356 closes.
  • FIG 7D is a detailed schematic diagram of the dynamic braking relay 322 of Figure 7A.
  • Dynamic braking relay circuit 322 basically comprises relay switches 370 and 372, series-connected resistor 374, actuating solenoid 376, and transient diode 378.
  • relay switches 370 and 372 are normally in the downward position so as to pass the LOADLO/LOADHI control current signal of controller 320 to motor 50 (Figure 7A).
  • Input +BRAKE is maintained at a positive voltage ("high") level and relay switches 370 and 372 remain in the normal downward position.
  • solenoid 376 is actuated, and forces switches 370 and 372 into the upward position. This not only interrupts the provision of control currents signal LOADLO/LOADHI to the motor 50, but also achieves a dynamic braking effect by short-circuiting the input terminals to motor 50, via the short-circuit connection established between switches 370 and 372.
  • Figure 8 is a diagrammatic representation of the relay panel 20 of the CEOG system.
  • relay panel 20 receives various input control signals from control panel 54 and logic section 62 ( Figure 2), and in response thereto, controls the operations of the light source 12, mirrors 14, shutter 66, optokinetic device 16 (comprising motors 74 and 74' and stripe cage 76), the flasher motor 68 and flasher 70.
  • relay panel 20 receives feedback signals (XBACK and YBACK) from the mirrors 14, and provides these feedback signals, via control panel 54, to logic section 62, wherein -- as will be subsequently described -- compensation for the distortion of the light source projection on the cylindrical walls 18 ( Figure 1) of the test station 4 is achieved.
  • Relay panel 20 receives various D.C. voltage inputs (+12 v. and +15 v.), and an A.C. input (110 v.).
  • the A.C. input to relay panel 20 is merely passed therethrough, so as to provide A.C. power to the laser 12 ( Figure 2).
  • the 12 v. D.C. input is provided, via relay switches 402 and 404 and resistor 406, as inputs (LITE1 and LITE2) to the lamp 400 which illuminates the stripe cage 76 ( Figure 2).
  • relay switches 402 and 404 which are normally in the open position, are actuated to the closed position by solenoid 408 when (received from logic section 62) goes “low.” On the other hand, in response to going “high, " solenoid 408 is off, and switches 402 and 404 return to the normally open position, interrupting D.C. power supply to the lamp 400.
  • relay panel 20 includes a capacitor 412 having its positive terminal connected to power input +RELAY. Capacitor 412 acts as a noise-prevention filter for the +RELAY input (a positive voltage -- for example, 15 volts).
  • relay panel 20 includes switches 422 and 424 which remain in the normally open position so long as input (from logic section 62 of Figure 2) is "high.” However, in response to signal going "low” (thus commanding turn-on of the stripe cage motor 74), solenoid 420 causes switches 422 and 424 to close, thus defining paths for the input of +12 volts and its return, respectively.
  • the aforementioned power input paths include switches 416 and 418 which are normally (so long as from logic section 62 remain “high") in the upward position, so that +12 volts and its return are provided to input terminals A and B, respectively, of motor 74.
  • This power input to motor 74 raises, or maintains in the raised position, the stripe cage 76 of optokinetic device 16.
  • motor 74 generates status output signals LIMUPOK or LIMDNOK when the stripe cage 76 is raised to its upper limit or lowered to its lower limit, respectively.
  • Relay panel 20 also includes an arrangement of switches and solenoids for controlling the raising and lowering of the flasher 70 by motor 68. Specifically, switches 428 and 430 remain in the normal upward position so long as input signal applied to solenoid 432, stays "high” -- indicating a desire on the part of the operator to maintain the motor 68 in the "off” condition. In fact, switches 428 and 430, when in the upward position, create a short circuit across the power input terminals of motor 68.
  • Relay panel 20 of Figure 8 receives input signals -CGMTR and +CGMTR from control panel 54 ( Figure 2), and supplies same to motor 74' for the purpose of controlling the speed of rotation of the stripe cage 76 by motor 74'.
  • Relay panel 20 also receives inputs -SHUT and +SHUT from control panel 54, and provides same to shutter 66 ( Figure 2) for the purpose of opening and closing the shutter 66 in response thereto.
  • relay panel 20 provides D.C. power to the mirrors 14, and as well provides output signals XDRIVE and YDRIVE (received from logic section 62 via control panel 54) to the mirrors 14 for the purpose of driving the mirrors in the X and Y directions, respectively.
  • Relay panel 20 also receives, from mirrors 14, the X and Y position signals XBACK and YBACK which are provided to logic section 62 (via control panel 54) for the purpose of developing the POSX and POSY status inputs to processor 34 via interface 30.
  • control panel 54 of Figure 2 will now be described in more detail with reference to Figures 9A through 9E.
  • the control panel 54 ( Figure 2) basically serves two purposes. First, it is used as a junction box to distribute power throughout the system, and to act as a common distribution point for most of the control and status signals passing through the CEOG system. Secondly, it serves the usual function of a control panel -- visibly, allowing the operator to interact with the system by means of switches and display indicators. In the preferred embodiment, the former function -- that of a junction box -- is served by having one cable from each functional unit (for example, as seen in Figure 2) to the control panel, as opposed to having a plurality of cables passing throughout the system between the various functional units.
  • Figure 9A is a diagrammatic representation of the operator control section of the control panel 54 of the CEOG system.
  • control section 450 of control panel 54 comprises a plurality of display indicators (DS), switches (S), and adjustment knobs connected to potentiometers (P).
  • various display indicators, switches and adjustment knobs can be divided into various categories relating to power, chair control, stripe cage operations, flasher operations, and light source (laser) and mirror operations.
  • Operator control section 450 includes an A.C. power switch S 1 , by means of which the system is turned on and A.C. power is supplied thereto.
  • Application of A.C. power is indicated by display indicator DS1.
  • display indicator DS1 As indicated previously, with respect to Figure 2, application of A.C. power to the CEOG system, and specifically to power supply 60 thereof, results in generation of various D.C. supply voltages.
  • operator control section 450 includes various display indicators DS2, DS3, DS4 and DS5, indicating availability of the various D.C. power supply voltages -- +5 v., -15 v., +15 v., and +12 v., respectively.
  • Operator control section 450 also includes a switch S 2 for turning on the motor 50 (Figure 2) for the purpose of powering the chair 8.
  • Display indicator DS6 indicates when the motor 50 is turned on.
  • a desired speed of the motor 50, and thus a desired speed of revolution of the chair 8 is selected by the operator by means of adjustment knob P 1 which is connected to a potentiometer (not shown) for generating the signal MTRSPD applied to the motor controller 52 ( Figure 2), and specifically to the linear servo controller 320 thereof ( Figure 7A) .
  • Operator control section 450 of Figure 9A also includes switches S 3 and S 4 for causing momentary stopping and starting, respectively, of the chair 8 ( Figure 2), and a display indicator DS7 indicating when a "CHAIR READY" condition exists.
  • operator control section 450 includes a reset switch S 5 , which is preferably a momentary switch comprising a manual reset button which is utilized for a multitude of purposes, visibly: (1) to cause the rotatable chair 8 ( Figure 2) to be rotated to its normal (reset) position; and (2) to clear a number of computer bits such as SCAN (referring to mirror scanning) and RECORDING ON DISK (to be discussed below).
  • a reset switch S 5 is preferably a momentary switch comprising a manual reset button which is utilized for a multitude of purposes, visibly: (1) to cause the rotatable chair 8 ( Figure 2) to be rotated to its normal (reset) position; and (2) to clear a number of computer bits such as SCAN (referring to mirror scanning) and RECORDING ON DISK (to be discussed below).
  • Operator control section 450 also includes switches S 7 and S 8 for raising and lowering, respectively, the stripe cage 76 ( Figure 2).
  • switches S 7 and S 8 are one-shot push-button switches for raising and lowering, respectively, the stripe cage 76 in response to a single push of the respective buttons S 7 nd S 8 .
  • operator control section 450 includes an adjustment knob P 2 connected to a potentiometer (not shown) -- preferably, a 10-turn potentiometer -- for adjusting the speed of rotation of the stripe cage 76 ( Figure 2).
  • Operator control section 450 also includes an on-off switch S 11 for activating-deactivating a linear light bulb 400 ( Figure 8) inside the stripe cage 76 ( Figure 2).
  • a three-position switch S 14 having positions "left" and "right” for designating respective leftward and rightward directions of rotation of the stripe cage 76, and an "off" position for turning off the rotatable stripe cage 76.
  • Operator control section 450 also includes display indicator DS8 for indicating the "stripes ready" condition, display indicator DS9 (RECORDING ON DISK) which is an indicator that flashes when the computer is transferring data to the disk (so that the system operator will not inadvertently fill the disk to full capacity) and push-button switches S 9 and S 10 for raising and lowering, respectively, the flasher 70 ( Figure 2).
  • display indicator DS8 for indicating the "stripes ready" condition
  • display indicator DS9 RECORDING ON DISK
  • push-button switches S 9 and S 10 for raising and lowering, respectively, the flasher 70 ( Figure 2).
  • operator control section 450 includes adjustment knobs P 3 and P 4 for controlling the horizontal speed and vertical position, respectively, of the light generated by the light source (laser) 12 ( Figure 12).
  • adjustment knob P 3 is connected to a potentiometer (not shown) -- preferably, a 10-turn potentiometer -- for controlling the horizontal speed of the light spot seen by the subject 2 ( Figure 2), such light spot being controlled as a result of movement of the mirrors 14 reflecting the light from the laser 12, such movement of the mirrors 14 being in turn controlled by the potentiometer (not shown) as set by the operator via adjustment of knob P 3 .
  • Vertical position of the light spot seen by the subject 2 is controlled by adjustment of the laser 12 via the potentiometer (not shown) as set by the adjustment knob P 4 .
  • Operator control section 450 also, preferably, includes a manual function switch S 12 , by means of which the position of the light spot generated by the laser 12 and mirrors 14 ( Figure 2) can be controlled in accordance with various functions -- for example, an alternating square wave function, alternating ramp function, and alternating sine wave function.
  • Operator control section 450 includes a toggle switch S 13 for operator selection of the "set-up” or “automatic” modes of operation of the light source 12 and mirrors 14 ( Figure 2). That is to say, designation of the "set-up” mode of operation causes the subject 2 to be subjected to light source stimuli in accordance with a pattern selected by the physician administering the test by means of a previously explained control contained in the operator control section 450. Conversely, designation of the "automatic" mode of operation causes the subject 2 to be subjected to light stimuli as controlled by the computer (processor) 34 of the CEOG system.
  • Operator control section 450 includes a test warning indicator DS10, which is actuated when testing of or adjustment to the system is being performed
  • test warning condition consists of the release of the electromagnetic brake on the chair 8 ( Figure 2) so that the chair 8 can be turned manually away from its normal (reset) position.
  • Operator control section 450 also includes a display indicator DS11 for indicating the "scan" mode of operation of the CEOG system, and a switch S 6 for designating that the number of turns through which the chair 8 ( Figure 2) is to be rotated is as indicated (automatically) by the computer processor 34 of the CEOG system.
  • FIGS 9B through 9E are detailed schematic diagrams of the control panel 54 of the CEOG system.
  • Figure 9B is a detailed schematic diagram relating to the power distribution functions performed by the control panel 54 of Figure 2, as well as relating to the on-off A.C. power switch (S 1 ) and various display indicators (DS1, DS2, etc.) appearing in the operator control section 450 of the control panel 54.
  • actuation of the switch S 1 causes A.C. power in to be distributed -- via terminal board TB1 -- to various parts of the CEOG system via connector terminals J103, J110 (terminals E, F, and G thereof), etc.
  • power supply 60 ( Figure 2), in response to actuation of A.C. power in the system, generates D.C. supply voltages (for example, +5 v., +12 v., ⁇ 15 v., etc.), as needed.
  • display indicators DS7 through DS10 certain of the modes of operation or conditions of the CEOG system are indicated by display indicators DS7 through DS10. Specifically, in accordance with the arrangement shown in Figure 9B, occurrence of a "chair ready” condition causes one terminal of display indicator DS7 to go “low” (as indicated by ) , and this grounding of one side of display indicator DS7 causes application of a +15 volt D.C. voltage to display indicator DS7, resulting in visual display of the "chair ready” condition. In a similar manner, display indicators DS8 through DS10 indicate the "stripes ready,"
  • circuit 456 receives an input MTRSPD1, provided (as will be seen below) by logic portion L3 ( Figure 10F), which converts the digital signals RUNFWD, RUNBKD and RUNSLOW to analog signals.
  • Circuit 462 shows switch S 2 , by means of which the motor power supply for operation of the chair 8 ( Figure 2) is turned on.
  • Display indicator DS6 indicates "motor power on” when the chair motor is powered on, and output signals MTPWR and MTRSWON (to be discussed below) are produced in the process.
  • Circuit 464 in Figure 9C includes switch S 3 which is a momentary switch which, upon actuation, is momentarily moved from an "up” position to a “down” position, thus transferring a ground condition from terminals to terminals STOPSW.
  • switch S 3 is a momentary switch which, upon actuation, is momentarily moved from an "up” position to a “down” position, thus transferring a ground condition from terminals to terminals STOPSW.
  • terminals STOPSW and are used to set and reset, respectively, a no-bounce switch 750.
  • Circuit 466 includes switch S 4 which operates in the same manner as switch S 3 to selectively produce ground conditions at terminals STRSW and
  • circuit 468 selectively produces ground conditions at RSTSW and
  • Circuit 470 includes switch S 6 (a toggle switch) which, in its upward or closed position, designates local control of the number of turns or revolutions which the chair 8 ( Figure 2) is to take before being stopped.
  • the number of turns or revolutions is locally designated by the operator utilizing a decoded thumb-wheel switch S 21 -S 24 located in logic portion L1' of Figure 10B (to be discussed below).
  • switch S 6 turns control of the number of revolutions of the chair 8 ( Figure 2) over to the computer for automatic control thereof.
  • Circuit 472 includes potentiometer 474 associated with adjustment knob P 2 ( Figure 9A), by means of which stripe speed is designated as a result of voltage division of a +15 volt input between resistor 476 and potentiometer 474, providing an analog output
  • Circuits 478 and 480 includes switches S 7 and S 8 , respectively, which, in response to actuation thereof, generate outputs and respectively, designating upward and downward movement, respectively, of the cage 76 ( Figure 2).
  • Circuit 482 includes switch S 13 which, in its upward position, provides output calling for the mirrors 14 (Figure 2) to move in accordance with the setting of manual function switch S12 (in operator control section 450 of Figure 9A).
  • Switch S 13 -- in its lower position -- turns control of the mirrors 14 over to the computer processor 34 ( Figure 2) for automatic control thereof.
  • Circuit 484 includes display indicator DS11 which is actuated by a +15 volt input in response to terminal going "low.” Terminal goes “low” as a result of logic operations performed in portion L9 ( Figure 10L), as will be described in more detail below, when: (1) the setup switch S13 is "on,”
  • Circuits 486 and 488 include switches S 9 and S 10 , respectively, which operate in the same manner as previously described with respect to circuits 464 and 466.
  • the output conditions at terminal UPFLSW, DWNFLSW, etc. in circuits 486 and 488 are utilized to set/reset no-bounce switches contained in portion L4' ( Figure 10I).
  • Circuit 490 includes switch S 11 which, in response to actuation thereof, issues output signal STRPSW indicating "turn on” of the light 400 (Figure 8) in stripe cage 76 ( Figure 2).
  • Circuit 492 includes switch S 12 by means of which three scanning functions for scanning of the light source 12 ( Figure 2) -- under control of the mirrors 14 -- may be chosen. Specifically, output signals and are provided in correspondence to desired scanning in accordance with square wave, triangular (or ramp function) and sine wave functions, respectively.
  • Circuit 494 includes potentiometer 496 corresponding to adjustment knob P 3 ( Figure 9A), by means of which horizontal speed of the mirrors 14 ( Figure 2) can be chosen. Circuit 494 produces output signal OSREF, which designates the desired horizontal scanning speed of the mirrors 14 relative to lowermost and uppermost reference speeds determined by the voltage dividing resistors 498 and 500, respectively.
  • Circuit 502 discloses potentiometer 504 corresponding to adjustment knob P 4 ( Figure 9A) , by means of which vertical positioning of the beam from light source 12 is adjusted. As a result of such adjustment, circuit 502 performs voltage division by means of potentiometer 504 so as to provide output signal VERTPOS indicating the desired vertical positioning of the beam from light source 12. It is to be noted that, as will be seen below in connection with the discussion of portion L10 ( Figure 10M), potentiometer 504 acts in parallel with the MOVY input from the computer, and with any other signals which are summed in a summing amplifier of portion L10, to develop the. output YDRIVE, by means of which the desired vertical positioning of the beam from light source 12 is achieved.
  • circuit 506 discloses switch S 14 ( Figure 9A), by means of which leftward or rightward movement, or stopping, of the stripe cage 76 ( Figure 2) is achieved.
  • Leftward movement of the stripe cage 76 corresponds to output -CGMTR
  • rightward movement of the stripe cage 76 corresponds to output +CGMTR -- these two output signals being provided to relay panel 20 ( Figure 8), and thence to motor 74' so as to achieve leftward or rightward movement, respectively, of the stripe cage 76 ( Figure 2 ) under the control of the motor 74'.
  • switch S 14 has an "off" position whereby neither leftward nor rightward movement of the stripe cage 76 is designated.
  • circuit 506 further comprises a switch S 14 ' which is gang-connected to switch S 14 , and which generates outputs and in response to actuation of switch S 14 to the "left" and "right” position, respectively. The outputs and are provided as status signals to logic section 62 ( Figure 2).
  • circuits 530 through 533 are shown, which circuits are utilized for converting various control signals to driver signals.
  • circuit 530 converts signals TWLON (Test Warning Light On) and CHRDYON (Chair Ready On) to signals which can light display indicators DS10 and DS7, respectively ( Figure 9A) .
  • Circuit 531 supplies a regulated +12.3 volts, called +RELAY, which signal -- as will be recalled with respect to Figure 8 -- is provided to relay panel 20 for the purpose of powering certain previously described solenoid/relay switch combinations.
  • Circuit 532 converts input signals RELBRK
  • circuit 533 converts input signal STRIPESPD -- from the "center wiper" of the potentiometer 474 ( Figure 9C) associated with adjustment knob P2 ( Figure 9A) -- to output signals +CGMTR and -CGMTR provided to relay panel 20 ( Figure 8 ) , and thence to motor 74' for the purpose of turning the stripe cage 76 ( Figure 2) at a given speed.
  • circuit 533 under the influence of further input TRNCG (Turn Cage) provided (via resistor 536) to the base of transistor 535, the latter pulling -CGMTR to ground so as to turn on the stripe cage motor 74' ( Figure 8).
  • TRNCG Transmission Cage
  • the operator can take the following actions: (1) fie will power-up the CEOG system by actuating switch S 1 on operator control section 450 ( Figure 9A), thus distributing A.C. power and various D.C. supply voltages to various parts of the CEOG system, as previously described with reference to Figure 9B.
  • mirrors 14 will scan the X direction in accordance with the particular manual function previously designated by the operator utilizing switch S 12 in operator control section 450 ( Figure
  • the Y position of the mirror will be determined by a combination of the setting of adjustment knob P 4 (and potentiometer circuit 502) and a MOVY command from computer processor 34 ( Figure 2), as will be discussed in more detail below.
  • the scanning speed of mirrors 14 ( Figure 2) will be determined by the setting of adjustment knob P 3 (in conjunction with potentiometer circuit 494), and will preferably yield a scanning cycle time of from 0.8 seconds to 10 seconds duration.
  • this mode of operation will be indicated on display indicator DS11 (see circuit 484 of Figure 9C).
  • switch S 13 is a toggle switch, such that subsequent toggling of switch S 13 will result in "automatic" mode of scanning.
  • scanning will be performed under computer control.
  • the computer processor 34 can be programmed to completely and exclusively control the scanning pattern, speed, etc. to which the subject 2 is subjected.
  • the computer can be programmed so that scanning can be controlled as to the scanning pattern in accordance with whichever scanning function is manually selected at switch S 12 , and can also be controlled so as to cause the horizontal speed of scanning to be in accordance with whatever horizontal speed is set manually at adjustment knob P 3 of operator control section 450.
  • the computer processor 34 can be programmed to cause vertical scanning to be conducted in accordance with whatever speed is set on adjustment knob P 3 (even though adjustment knob P 3 is normally utilized to merely designate horizontal speed of scanning).
  • the CEOG system can be programmed (as will be seen subsequently) to continue rotation, but this time in the counter-clockwise direction (presuming that the previous direction of rotation was clockwise), in response to further actuation of switch S 4 .
  • the operator can either press a computer console button calling for a hard-copy printout of the test results, or can type a predesignated character (such as the character "R” ) on the console of the computer so as to record the test results on a more permanent storage (such as disk 42 ( Figure 2)).
  • a computer console button calling for a hard-copy printout of the test results
  • a predesignated character such as the character "R”
  • disk 42 Figure 2
  • the system can operate in an "automatic reset" mode of operation, by which reverse chair rotation will take place in a “slow mode” of operation, and the CEOG system will seek a
  • limit switch setting -- corresponding to a normal (reset) position -- at which time chair rotation will be stopped. This will be explained in more detail below.
  • switch S 6 gives the operator the alternatives of "local” control or “computer” control of the number of turns through which the chair 8 ( Figure 2) is to pass prior to being automatically stopped.
  • the number of turns through which the rotating chair is to pass can be locally designated by actuation of a decoded thumbwheel switch S 21 -S 24 in portion LI' ( Figure 10B) of logic section 62 ( Figure 2) .
  • operator console section 450 Figure 9A
  • the stripe cage 76 will be lowered into position.
  • Figures 10A through 10N are detailed logic block diagrams and circuit schematics of the logic section 62 of the CEOG system.
  • Logic section 62 ( Figure 2) receives electronic signals from three sources: the computer processor 34 via EOG interface 30 ( Figure 2), the switches on the control panel ( Figure 9A) and associated circuitry ( Figures 9B through 9E), and other units or elements of the CEOG system (as will be described below).
  • the logic section 62 processes all of these incoming signals, and produces control and indicator signals that are distributed to the remainder of the CEOG system.
  • Logic section 62 will, for the purpose of the discussion below, be divided into logic section portions L1 through L5 and L8 through L11, each of which will now be considered in detail.
  • Figures 10A and 10B are detailed logic diagrams/ schematics of the portions L1 and L1', respectively, of logic section 62 ( Figure 2). Portions of L1 and L1' of logic section 62 basically perform the following four functions:
  • one-shot device 616 protects the RST output from being immediately turned off -- as, for example, by reception of a "high” signal from NAND gate 626 if NEARRST or ZERO go “low.”
  • NAND gate 608 is caused to issue the output RST upon setting of the no-bounce switch 600 (NAND gates 602 and 604 connected as shown) upon receipt of the "high" RSTSW input, provided by operator actuation of switch S 5 in operator control section 450 ( Figure 9A) -- see also circuit 468 ( Figure 9C).
  • NAND gate 608 is caused to issue the RST output as a result of inputs ZERO and NEARRST (received by NAND gate 626) both being "high” or "on.”
  • Input ZERO is an output provided by decoder 664 in portion L1' ( Figure 10B) which, as will be seen below, indicates that the chair has been rotated in the reverse direction by a prescribed number of turns.
  • input NEARRST is an output of portion L2' ( Figure 10D) which, as will be seen below, is a control signal indicating that the chair is in the "backward rotation" mode of operation.
  • circuit 632 comprises a timer 634 which provides, at its Q output, an oscillator output BLINK applied to various selected display indicators to achieve a "blinking" effect.
  • the test warning indicator DS10 ( Figure 9A) can be caused to blink by application thereto of output BLINK of circuit 632 ( Figure 10A).
  • circuit 632 includes a NAND gate 638 which performs an OR-type operation with respect to inputs and so that the output TWLON (Test Warning Light On) is issued in the presence of either input or and input BLINK.
  • TWLON Transmission Warning Light On
  • circuit 632 includes a NAND gate 638 which performs an OR-type operation with respect to inputs and so that the output TWLON (Test Warning Light On) is issued in the presence of either input or and input BLINK.
  • TWLON Transmission Warning Light On
  • input BLINK input BLINK
  • multiplexer (MUX) 650 receives and multiplexes turn information either generated by the computer as bits 1-4 from the processor 34 ( Figure 2), or locally designated via switches S 21 -S 24 .
  • the multiplexed output of multiplexer 650 is provided to latch circuit 652 which provides its latched output to the A0-A3 inputs of comparator circuit 654.
  • Circuit 656 of portion L1' of Figure 10B responds to an input POSDET (representing chair position information), and -- via analog comparator 658 and NAND gate 660 -- generates output POSCLK whenever a reflective strip 350 (Figure 7A) on the chair is detected by photodetector 354.
  • Output POSCLK provides a clocking input at the CK terminal of counter 662 which is an up-down counter for up-counting the number of chair revolutions (for example, during clockwise rotation), and for conversely down-counting the number of chair revolutions (for example, during counter-clockwise chair rotation).
  • the outputs Q A -Q D of Counter 662 provide the B0-B3 inputs to comparator 654.
  • digital comparator 654 compares the desired number of chair revolutions to the actual number of chair revolutions, and when the two coincide, comparator 654 generates the output MATCH.
  • Counter 662 is enabled, for counting, by the logical input (provided by a GO flip-flop 752 in portion L2 of Figure 10D, to be discussed below). Counter 662 is reset upon occurrence of (indicating system reset). Up or down counting of counter 662 is determined by the logical input DOWN (provided by up/down flip-flop 772 of portion L2 of Figure 10D). The outputs Q A -Q D of counter 662 are provided to decoder 664 which issues a output upon occurrence of a complete chair cycle (clockwise rotation followed by counter-clockwise rotation). The output has already been discussed with reference to circuit 618 ( Figure 10A).
  • the output of comparator 658 is provided to a monostable device 666 which generates a output to NAND gate 660 so that output POSCLK will have a minimum time duration in response to either the output from comparator 658 and/or that from monostable device 666.
  • Circuit 668 of portion L1' comprises NAND gates 670, 672 and 674, and inverters 676 and 678, which provide a clock input to latch circuit 652 under either of the following two conditions:
  • latching of data by latch circuit 652 is controlled by the RST (Reset) signal received at AND gate 674 (enabled by an input from the switch S 6 via inverter 676), and provided to the CLK input of latch 652 via OR gate 672 and inverter 678.
  • RST reset
  • latching of data by latch circuit 652 is controlled by STROBX (a computer-generated strobe signal) provided via AND gate 670 (enabled by an enabling input from switch S 6 ), OR gate 672 and inverter 678.
  • switch S 6 is a toggle switch correspondingly designated in operator control section 450 ( Figure 9A). Closing of the switch results in a ground connection, resulting in a "low” input to AND gate 670 (disabling computer-controlled latching) and resulting in a “high” (inverted “low”) input to enable AND gate 674 for reset-controlled latching of data. Conversely, opening of switch S 6 results in application of a +5 volt ( "high”) input to enable AND gate 670 for computer-controlled latching, and to disable AND gate 674 to preclude reset-controlled latching.
  • input POSDET is an analog signal produced when light is detected from a reflective strip 350 on chair 8 ( Figure 7A). Such light is detected by comparator 658 ( Figure 10B), the negative input of which is adjusted by level-detector potentiometer P 2 .
  • comparator 658 triggers one-shot device 666 (preferably, having a one-shot duration of .25 seconds) so as to maintain an output POSCLK issuing from NAND gate 660 connected to the output of comparator 658. That is to say, NAND gate 660 performs an OR operation between the outputs of comparator 658 and one-shot 666.
  • circuit 656 insures that output POSCLK is of minimum acceptable duration, and output POSCLK is provided as a clocking input to counter 662 (for counting chair rotations), and as a further input to portion L2 ' ( Figure 10D), as will be discussed below.
  • Figures 10C, 10D(1) and 10E are detailed schematics of further portions L2, L2 ' and L2 " , respectively, of logic section 62 of Figure 2.
  • Figure 10D(2) is a timing diagram for explaining the timing of the operations of portion L2' of Figure 10D(1).
  • portions L2, L2' and L2" receive input signals STRSW (start switch), STOPSW (stop switch), RST (reset), (start limit switch), and MATCH (indicating that the number of counts of chair revolutions matches the predetermined value).
  • Portions L2, L2' and L2" provide logic circuitry for performing various logic functions so as to provide the following signals in proper sequence: CHRDYON (Chair Ready On), RUNIB (Run Motor), RELBRK (Release Brake), FWD (Go Forward), (Run Slowly), and DOWN (Count Down).
  • CHRDYON Chair Ready On
  • RUNIB Raster Drive
  • RELBRK Release Brake
  • FWD Go Forward
  • Run Slowly DOWN
  • a Run flip-flop (NAND gates 700) which provides via inverter 701 an output RUNIB when the chair motor is running, such output being provided to portion L3' ( Figure 10G).
  • the output from flip-flop 700 is OR'ed (in NAND gate 702) with input to provide output RELBRK (Release Brake) either when the motor is running (as indicated by RUNIB) or when manual rotation of the chair is indicated (by from portion L3' of Figure 10G).
  • RELBRK Release Brake
  • a Forward/Backward flip-flop (NAND gates 704) which issues an output FWD which is "high” when the chair is being driven in the forward direction, or "low” when the chair is being driven in the backward direction.
  • a Run Slow flip-flop (NAND gates 706) which issues an output which is "low” when the chair is running slow. It is to be noted that the chair runs slow only in the backward direction, as dictated by the application of output FWD from NAND gate 704 via inverter 708 to device 706 (lowermost NAND gate thereof). It is to be further noted that device 706 is set by input such that the resetting of the system by the operator causes the chair to rotate slowly in the backward direction, this being done for the purpose of centering the chair in its normal (reset) position. It will be recalled that resetting of the CEOG system results in generation (as previously discussed) of signal RST.
  • input RST is provided via inverter 710 to flip-flop 712, causing resetting of flip-flop 712.
  • the output (to NAND gate 714) is "high.” goes “low” when the chair 8 finds the start limit switch 356, and NAND gate 714 provides the output CHRDYON.
  • CHRDYON is also produced when signal -- a signal produced by a Hold flip-flop to be discussed in connection with Figure 10D(1) below -- goes “low.”
  • the signal CHRDYON (Chair Ready On) is provided to a circuit 530 ( Figure 9E), wherein it is converted to an output which in turn is responsible for activation of display indicator DS7 ( Figure 9B), which indicates the "chair ready” condition.
  • resetting of the system results in application of signal RST via inverter 710 as a clock input to Check Mechanical Ready flip-flop 716, causing a Q output therefrom to NAND gate 718.
  • NAND gate 728 performs an AND operation with respect to the inputs thereto. Specifically, when goes “high,” and when the output of inverter 732 goes “high” as a result of NAND gate 722 issuing a “low” output, and further when the Q output (MECRDY) of flip-flop 712 goes “high,” the Check Mechanical Ready flip-flop 716 is reset, resulting in removal of the Q input from NAND gates 718 and 722, respectively.
  • NAND gate 754 performs an OR operation between XYZ and the further input (STRSW . HOLD) -- provided by NAND gate 756 -- to produce output GOB, the latter being provided as a clock input to "turn on” Go flip-flop 758. Generation of output GOB also turns on the Run flip-flop 700 ( Figure 10C).
  • POSCLK is the primary clock pulse, based on which the number of rotations of the chair is counted. It is to be noted that, in the preferred embodiment, the chair rotates through a one-quarter turn before reception of the first POSCLK pulse. In Figure 10D(2), it is presumed that the number of rotations is preset for three. Upon the completion of two and one-quarter turns -- that is, the beginning of the third full turn -- the comparator output MATCH occurs, and flip-flop 766 is set with the reception of the next POSCLK pulse.
  • the Q output of flip-flop 766 enables one-shot device 768 so as to produce a output on the trailing edge of POSCLK for a prescribed period of time (preferably, 0.1 seconds), this output being defined as signal
  • the latter is a negative pulse applied to Forward/Backward flip-flop 704 ( Figure 10C) to reset the flip-flop 704, resulting in FWD going "low,” further resulting in rotation in the backward direction of the chair 8 ( Figure 2).
  • flip-flop 766 has its reset input connected to a series connection of NAND gate 778 and inverter 780, NAND gate 778 performing an OR operation between input and input
  • flip-flop 766 is reset under either of two conditions: (1) generation of the negative pulse ; or (2) occurrence of the reset input Up/Down flip-flop 782 is set by the output of flip-flop 766 when flip-flop 766 first goes “on,” issuing the output DOWN, indicating the down-count mode of operation of the counter 662 ( Figure 10B).
  • NAND gate 626 ( Figure 10A) performs an AND operation with respect to inputs ZERO and NEARRST, and as a result of the OR operation of NAND GATE 608, the output RST is issued by the arrangement of Figure 10A. See the timing diagram of Figure 10D(2). As previously explained, with reference to Figure 10A, this output RST lasts for 0.1 seconds as a result of the operation of one-shot 616, which deactivates NAND gate 608 after that time period.
  • the output HOLD is AND'ed with BLINK in NAND gate 792, resulting in the latter being provided -- as previously discussed -- to NAND gate 714 in Figure 10C, for the purpose of generating the CHRDYON (Chair Ready On) indicator.
  • the HOLD output is provided to NAND gate 756, the other input of which receives the "set" output of flip-flop 750, the latter being set by actuation of the start switch (reception of signal STRSW).
  • actuation of the start switch results in reverse rotation of the chair 8 ( Figure 2).
  • the chair 8 can, of course, be stopped manually, by actuation of the Stop switch, generating signal STOPSW.
  • the latter signal is a "set” input to flip-flop 794, resulting in generation of output
  • the latter output turns off the Run flip-flop 700, resulting in stopping of rotation of the chair.
  • portion L2" receives input MTRSWON from circuit 462 as a result of the actuation of switch S 2 in the operator control section 450 ( Figure 9A), and receives input RELBRK from circuit 532 ( Figure 9E).
  • both MTRSWON and RELBRK be "high” -- this will cause the output of inverter 802 to be “high,” which will turn on transistor Q1, and accordingly turn off transistor Q2.
  • the dynamic braking relay 322 Figure 7A
  • Logic portion L2" ( Figure 10E) also has a manual brake on/off switch 804 which, in the downward position, manually allows the portion L2" to function as described above. Conversely, when switch 804 is in the upward position, brake application is removed from the chair 8 for manual positioning. In this case, test warning indicator DS10 in operator control section 450 ( Figure 9A) comes on, as a result of being "low” (connected to ground).
  • FIGS 10F and 10G are detailed schematics of portions L3 and L3', respectively, of the logic section 62 of Figure 2.
  • portion L3' receives inputs RUNIB (output of Run flip-flop 700 of Figure 10D(1)) and FWD (output of Forward/Backward flip-flop 704 of Figure 10D(1)).
  • Switch SC of portion L3' is a push-button switch actuated by the operator in order to manually rotate the chair 8 ( Figure 2).
  • N ND gates 870 and 878 perform an AND operation with respect to the inputs thereto, and NAND gate 872 OR's the outputs of gates 870 and 878.
  • NAND gate 872 issues an output under either of two conditions: (1) actuation of switch SC in the manual mode (MANMODE) of operation, or (2) receipt of Run flip-flop output RUNIB in the non-manual mode of operation.
  • NAND gates 880, 882 and 884 operate in a similar manner, so that NAND gate 882 issues an output under either of two conditions: (1) receipt of Forward/Backward flip-flop output FWD in the non-manual mode of operation, or (2) actuation of switch SD (to designate backward rotation) in the manual mode of operation.
  • NAND gate 876 issues output (provided to portion L3 of Figure 10F) provided that the following two conditions both exist: (1) running of the chair has been ordered either manually or automatically, and (2) either backward rotation of the chair has been manually designated, or forward rotation of the chair has been non-manually designated.
  • NAND gate 886 and inverter 884 combine to issue RUNBKD (provided to portion L3 of Figure 10F) under the following conditions: (1) running has been designated either manually or automatically, and (2) neither manual backward rotation nor automatic forward rotation have been designated.
  • the input will cause a current to flow into the negative input of op amp 822, but this current will not be applied instantaneously because of the RC time constant associated with resistor 830 and capacitor 832.
  • the current into op amp 822 will cause a voltage output from op amp 822. This voltage output is, preferably, +5 volts, as adjusted by potentiometer Pf associated with op amp 822.
  • the input (which is mutually exclusive from as dictated by the logic of Figure 10G) will cause a different output of op amp 822.
  • this voltage output of op amp 822 is preferably -5 volts.
  • the input will cause the output to be decreased in magnitude (preferably, from -5 volts to -2.5 volts). will be "on” only during system reset (as dictated by previously described signal RST).
  • portion L3 contains switches SA and SB which provide the capability of selecting manual operation of the chair motor 50 ( Figure 2), for example, for the purpose of testing the system.
  • Inputs and are provided to optical coupler devices 810 and 824, respectively.
  • input goes “low”
  • current is caused to flow through resistor 812, turning off NPN transistor 814, resulting in application of a negative current via resistors 816 and 820 to op amp 822.
  • op amp 822 provides a negative output.
  • optical coupler device 824 causes current to flow through resistor 826, turning off transistor 828, and resulting in a negative current input to the op amp 822.
  • op amp 822 provides a positive (+15 volts) input.
  • RSLOW RSLOW by inverter 836.
  • Optical coupler device 826 in response to detection of a "low” input, turns off PNP transistor 832, and a negative voltage is provided to the negative input of op amp 822.
  • resistors 834 and 838 are twice the impedance value of corresponding resistors (discussed above) 816, 830 and 820, 834 (respectively). Accordingly, the input to op amp 822 is not as large a negative current, but half that. As a result, op amp 822 issues an output one-half the magnitude of the previously discussed outputs.
  • Portion L3 includes switches SA and SB which are actuable to a "manual" position. In such position, output MTRSPDl is connected via potentiometer 852 to the output of op amp 822, with the result that manual adjustment of motor speed MTRSPDl can be accomplished. Moreover, when switch SB is moved to the "manual" position, output goes “low” indicating the
  • portion L3 is provided with a potentiometer 844 which is a zero-bias potentiometer, utilized to insure that the output of op amp 822 is zero volts when both and are "high” (that is, both RUNFWD and RUNBKWD are “off”).
  • a potentiometer 844 which is a zero-bias potentiometer, utilized to insure that the output of op amp 822 is zero volts when both and are "high” (that is, both RUNFWD and RUNBKWD are “off”).
  • FIGS 10H and 10I are detailed schematics of portions L4 and L4', respectively, of logic section 62 of Figure 2.
  • the logic circuitry in portions L4 and L4' receive signals from the various switches on the operator control section 450 ( Figure 9A), and as well from limit switches on the motors 68 and 74 ( Figure 2) which raise and lower the flasher 70 and stripe cage
  • logic portions L4 and L4' generally produce signals that operate relays in relay panel 20 ( Figures 2 and 8) previously discussed so as to raise and lower the flasher 70 and stripe cage 76, and to also rotate the stripe cage 76.
  • logic portions L4 and L4' provide status output signals which indicate, to the processor 34 ( Figure 2), the status of the two devices -- flasher 70 and stripe cage 76. Referring to portion L4 of Figure 10H, when goes “high,” flip-flop 900 is turned on. As a result, the Q output thereof is "low.”
  • Limit switches 902 and 904 are "limit up” and “limit down” switches, respectively, associated with the optokinetic device 16.
  • motor 74 -- which raises and lowers the stripe cage 76 -- includes, in the preferred embodiment, the switches 902 and 904 ( Figure 10H) .
  • Switches 902 and 904 are normally closed, but are selectively opened when the stripe cage 76 is raised by the motor 74 to its upper limit and lower limit, respectively.
  • the stripe cage 76 Upon system initialization, the stripe cage 76 will normally be in its uppermost position, such that switch 902 will be open and switch 904 will be closed. Moreover, resetting of the system in combination with upper limit switch 902 being open (LIMUPOF) and operator actuation of switch S 8 (to lower the stripe cage -- ) , results in operation of Up flip-flop 906 and Down flip-flop 908 via NAND gate 910 to turn the motor on ( goes “low”) and to designate lowering of the stripe cage 76 (via going "low”). Turn-on of the motor 74 and lowering of the stripe cage 76 is effected by signals and respectively, in the manner previously described with reference to Figure 8.
  • switch 904 opens, and the "stripes ready" condition is indicated via NAND gate 912, inverter 914 and NPN transistor 916, provided that switch S 11 (in operator control section 450 of Figure 9A) has been actuated to energize the stripe cage light 400 and stripe gate rotation motor 74' ( Figure 8).
  • NAND gate 912 issues output LITEON via inverter 918 and TRNCG via inverter 920, provided to circuits 532 and 533 ( Figure 9E), respectively, so as to provide further outputs and +CCMTR/-CGMTR to relay panel 20 and motor 74' ( Figure 8)
  • NAND gate 912 issues output LITEON via inverter 918 and TRNCG via inverter 920, provided to circuits 532 and 533 ( Figure 9E), respectively, so as to provide further outputs and +CCMTR/-CGMTR to relay panel 20 and motor 74' ( Figure 8)
  • going “low” results in application of power to stripe cage light 400
  • inputs -CGMTR and +CGMTR to motor 74' result in forward and reverse rotation, respectively, of the stripe cage 76 under the influence of motor 74'.
  • the direction of rotation of the stripe motor 76 ( Figure 8) is designated by switch S 14 in operator control section 450 ( Figure 9A) .
  • portion L4' includes a flip-flop 950 which is set by turn-on of the system power, at which time the Q output of flip-flop 950 is provided via NAND gates 952 and 954 to one-shot 956, which generates a short (preferably, 0.15 seconds) pulse Q.
  • NAND gate 952 performs an OR operation with respect to the inputs thereto, while NAND gate 954 permits the output of NAND gate 952 to be blocked by and LIMDNOF (the latter two signals being received from portion L4 of Figure 10H).
  • the Q output of one-shot 956 results in generation,' by NAND gate 958, of the output FLMTRON (Flasher Motor On), the latter comprising a "high" input to circuit 532 ( Figure 9E), generating a low output which causes application of power to the flasher motor 68 ( Figure 8).
  • the Q output of one-shot 956 resets the flip-flop 950.
  • Portion L4' also receives an input UPFLSW (as a result of operator actuation of switch S 9 in operator control section 450 of Figure 9A for the purpose of raising the flasher).
  • Input UPFLSW sets flip-flop 960, and the "set" output thereof is provided via NAND gates
  • flasher down switch S 8 in operator control section 450 results in setting of flip-flop 962 via DWNFLSW, and the set output thereof is provided -- via NAND gates 964 and 958 -- to produce FLMTRON (again, presuming that NAND gate 964 is not inhibited by and LIMDNOF).
  • FIG 10J is a detailed schematic of portion L5 of logic section 62 of Figure 2.
  • Portion L5 generates SYNCIN and 5MSSAMP which -- via photostimulator 72 ( Figure 2) -- operate the flasher 70, such operation being conducted under the control of computer processor 34 via EOG interface 30 and portion L5.
  • portion L5 actuates photostimulator 72 to send a trigger pulse to the flasher 70 to produce a single flash on command.
  • the CEOG system can, again via photostimulator 72, arrange for stimulation of the subject 2 -- and thus, transmission of electrode test data to the computer processor 34 -- once during any given time interval (for example, 2.5 milliseconds, 5 milliseconds, etc.).
  • portion L5 includes flip-flops 970 and 972 which are reset by a power-on initialization input or a computer initilization input ( , provided to flip-flops 970 and 972 via NAND gate 974 and inverter 976.
  • the Q output of flip-flop 970 actuates one-shot device 978 and series-connected one-shot device 980 to generate short (preferably, 10 microseconds) pulses separated by a longer (preferably, 5 milliseconds) time duration, such output being designated 5MSSAMP.
  • the latter comprises an "initiate sample” pulse provided to circuit 250 of Figure 6D, wherein it is utilized to provide the output SAMPLE (used for ADC in Figure 6A).
  • Flip-flop 972 -- via its output -- actuates solenoid/ switch combination 982 to cause closing of the switch so as to provide a variable (by virtue of potentiometers 984 and 986) time control to the one-shot device 980.
  • one-shot 980 can be adjusted to provide "initiate sample” pulses of less than 5 milliseconds (preferably, 2.5 milliseconds) duration.
  • one-shot 978 is triggered by the falling edge of the pulse output from the output of flip-flop 970. This falling edge is generated by flip-flop 970 in response to the D input, DOUT13 -- comprising a "Go bit” input from the computer processor 34 ( Figure 2). DOUT13 designates a desired stream of pulses which will occur typically at 5 millisecond intervals. Similarly, processor 34 provides input DOUT11 to the D input of flip-flop 972, and this results (as previously explained) in adjustment of one-shot 980 so as to provide a 2.5 millisecond "initiate sample” pulse separation.
  • flip-flops 970 and 972 are clocked (at the C inputs) by computer-generated strobe input provided via inverter 988. is, as will be seen below, decoded in interface 30 of Figure 2 (see discussion of Figure 11D below).
  • processor 34 Figure 2 generates a flash bit DOUT12, provided to the D input of flip-flop 990, the latter being clocked by computer-generated strobe
  • the Q output of flip-flop 990 triggers one-shot 992 which generates -- via inverter 994 -- a square wave pulse of short duration (preferably, 15 microseconds).
  • SYNCIN is a pulse, preferably having a 25-volt "swing,” and is provided to photostimulator 72 so as to synchronize the flashing light produced thereby.
  • Flip-flop 990 is reset either by operator-initiated reset or by the output of one-shot 992, provided via NAND gate 998 and inverter 999.
  • Figure 10K is a detailed schematic diagram of the portion L8 of logic section 62 of Figure 2.
  • Portion L8 uses feedback from the X mirror signal (XBACK) to generate a signal (YFIX) that is sent to the Y mirror 14 ( Figure 2) -- specifically, to the Y-deflection circuitry of mirrors 14 -- to correct for the curvature of the light spot (laser spot) on the cylindrical walls 18 ( Figure 1) of the test station 4.
  • XBACK X mirror signal
  • YFIX a signal
  • YFIX Y-deflection circuitry of mirrors 14
  • This curvature results from the fact that the laser 12 is located above the head of the subject 2, and is accordingly aimed downwardly on the cylindrical walls 18.
  • portion L8 receives input XBACK, an analog signal provided by mirrors 14.
  • Isolation op amp (voltage follower) 1000 in response to the positive input XBACK and the negative bias/gain-adjusted input (bias and gain are adjusted via potentiometers 1002 and 1004, respectively) -- provides its output to both positive inputs of a multiplier 1006.
  • Multiplier 1006 squares the output of amplifier 1000, and provides the result -- via isolation op amp (voltage follower) 1008 -- as output YFIX. The latter output YFIX is provided to portion L10 ( Figure 10M) to be discussed below.
  • portion L8 correction or compensation for the vertical angle existing between the line-of-sight from the light source (laser) 12 and the cylindrical wall 18 ( Figure 1) and the line-of-sight between the eyes of the subject 2 and the cylindrical walls 18 is achieved.
  • FIG. 10L is a detailed schematic diagram of the portion L9 of logic section 62 of Figure 2.
  • portion L9 receives and stores four bits from a Move X register (to be subsequently explained), the four bits being designated:
  • DOUT10 (GO X bit) -- a bit which causes scanning of the mirror in the X direction in accordance with circuitry contained in portion L10 ( Figure 10M) to be discussed below.
  • CMPSINE DOUT11 -- a bit which causes scanning of the mirror in the X direction using bits 0 through 9 of the MOVX register (to be discussed below), the deflection ranging from -30° to +30° in 1024 increments thereof.
  • DOUT12 CMPSHTR -- a bit which causes opening of the shutter 66 ( Figure 2).
  • DOUT13 YSCAN -- a bit which causes scanning of the mirror in the Y direction in accordance with a signal from the portion L10 ( Figure 10M) to be discussed below.
  • the output of flip-flop 1020 forms the output XSINE via NAND gate 1026.
  • NAND gate 1026 has its other input connected to switch S 13 (in operator control section 450 of Figure 9A), such that actuation of the auto/setup switch S 13 to the "setup" position (or DOUT10) will generate XSINE.
  • the output of inverter 1028 is OR'ed with the Q output of flip-flop 1022 in NAND gate 1032 to provide -- via transistor 1036 -- output is utilized to open/close the shutter 66 associated with the mirrors 14 ( Figure 2).
  • XSINE from inverter 1028 is AND'ed with the Q output of flip-flop 1021 in NAND gate 1030 and inverter 1034 to provide output CMPSINE.
  • inverter 1028 and NAND gate 1030 are OR'ed in NAND gate 1038, the latter providing a base-controlling input to transistor 1040.
  • Transistor 1040 provides a collector output the latter indicating operation of the laser 12 associated with the mirrors 14 and shutter 66 ( Figure 2).
  • the Q output of flip-flop 1023 is provided via inverter 1042 in a wire-OR'ed connection to the base of transistor 1040.
  • D0UT13 (YSCAN) -- input to flip-flop 1023 -- also actuates the scan light.
  • Portion L9 also includes flip-flop 1050 which is reset by initialization inpu (which occurs for one second after the power to the system is turned on) .
  • Flip-flop 1050 is set by inputs WRTONLY (indicating that the computer wants to write data to one of its register addresses) and (a strobe for loading data into the MOVY register, to be discussed below). These inputs are provided via inverter 1052 and NAND gate 1054.
  • the Q output of flip-flop 1050 is output (to be discussed further below with respect to Figure 10M).
  • Figures 10M and 10N are detailed schematic diagrams of portions L10 and L10', respectively, of logic section 62 of Figure 2. Portions L10 and L10' are responsible for performing various analog switching functions which enable the driving of the mirrors 14 ( Figure 2) in the X direction to be accomplished either under computer control or under local control. Furthermore, portions L10 and L10' are responsible for the performance of various summing and analog switching functions to accomplish the following:
  • portion L100' contains two buffer amplifiers provided for the purpose of feeding back the signal from the mirrors 14 ( Figure 2) so that the computer processor 34 can read and display the positions of the X mirror and Y mirror relative to the corresponding Position X and Position Y registers (discussed in more detail below).
  • portion LIO receives SIGOUT -- an analog signal produced by portion L11 ( Figure 100 -- to be discussed below); this analog signal defines a desired pattern of scanning to be performed by the laser 12/mirrors 14 ( Figure 2).
  • portion L10 receives output XSINE -- generated by portion L9 of Figure 10L, previously discussed -- the latter forming an enabling input permitting gate 1100 (preferably, a field-effect transistor analog switch) to pass SIGOUT through to the negative input of summing amplifier 1102, the positive input of which is connected to ground.
  • gate 1100 preferably, a field-effect transistor analog switch
  • summing amplifier 1102 produces mirror-driving output signal XDRIVE.
  • Portion L10 receives input MOVX (bits 0-9 of the MOVX register to be discussed below), and -- in a similar manner -- input MOVX is gated to the negative input of summing amplifier 1102 via gate 1104 enabled by input CMPSINE (generated by portion L9 of Figure 10L previously discussed). Proper biasing of the negative input of summing amplifier 1102 is provided by biasing circuitry 1106.
  • XSINE or CMPSINE is received by portion L10
  • SIGOUT the pattern generated by portion L11 of Figure 100
  • MOVX the computer-generated pattern
  • Output XDRIVE is an analog input to the X-driver card (not shown), which is a conventional hardware element supplied with the mirrors 14 ( Figure 2).
  • portion L10 initialization of the system results in generation of the latter being provided via amplifier 1112 as an enabling input to the switch 1114.
  • biasing voltage provided by biasing circuitry 1116 is gated through switch 1114 to the negative input of further summing amplifier 1118.
  • switch 1108 In response to input YSCAN (designating desired Y-direction scanning in accordance with the pattern SIGOUT), switch 1108 gates SIGOUT through to the negative input of amplifier 1118.
  • amplifier 1118 generates YDRIVE (the Y-direction driving signal for the mirrors 14 of Figure 2 ) in accordance with either SIGOUT (the pattern generated by portion L11 of Figure 100) or MOVY (the computer-generated pattern) .
  • the inverse of YSCAN is provided by inverter 1120 as an enabling input to switch 1122, thus disabling a further input to the negative input of amplifier 1118 (and thus, the parabolic correction when using YSCAN) .
  • Portion L10 includes circuitry 1130 and 1132 which supply voltages -V ss and +V dd , respectively, and are as well used to supply voltages to potentiometer 504.
  • Potentiometer 504 is associated with adjustment knob P 4 in operator control section 450 ( Figure 9A) which, as previously explained, is utilized to adjust the vertical position of the laser beam from light source 12.
  • the center tap thereof provides another summed input to the negative input of amplifier 1118, thus achieving necessary adjustment of the Y-direction mirror-driving output YDRIVE so as to achieve the desired vertical positioning of the light beam.
  • the portion L10' basically comprises an op amp (voltage-following) 1150 which receives feedback signal XBACK from the mirror driving circuitry in mirrors 14 ( Figure 2), and appropriately amplifies same to obtain the analog output POSX.
  • the analog output POSX is, as previously described, provided via converter stage 56 ( Figure 2) -- that is, the ADC portion thereof -- so as to provide the computer processor 34 with a digital input representative of the mirror position.
  • portion L10' is identical to a circuit which performs the same function with respect to the feedback signal YBACK (Y-direction feedback signal from the mirrors 14) so as to generate the analog output POSY.
  • Figure 100 is a detailed schematic diagram of the portion L11 of logic section 62 of Figure 2.
  • portion L11 includes a sine wave oscillator utilized in conjunction with establishment of a scanning pattern for the light beam generated by light source 12 in the case where manual function switch S 12 (on operator control section 450 of Figure 9A) is set to call for scanning of the light source 12 in accordance with a sine wave pattern.
  • manual function switch S 12 on operator control section 450 of Figure 9A
  • the frequency of the sine wave generated by the sine wave oscillator in portion L11 is controlled by various input signals corresponding to the scanning speed setting, as set by adjustment knob P 3 on operator control section 450.
  • portion L11 of Figure 100 contains the necessary circuitry for choosing between the various scanning waveform patterns, as selected by manual function switch S 12 .
  • device 1200 is a conventional device (preferably, an ICL8038 made by Intersil of Cupertino, California). It generates, at output terminal 2 thereof, a sine wave having characteristics as determined by an adjustable sine wave timing circuit 1202 provided at the L in terminal of the device 1200. In addition, device 1200 provides (at terminal 9 thereof) a square wave output and (at terminal 3 thereof) a sawtooth output. As previously discussed with reference to Figure 9C, switch S 12 is employed by the operator to designate the desired type of output. Switch S 12 generates signals and (selectively), and these inputs are provided to corresponding relays K1l, K12 and K13, respectively ( Figure 10L).
  • ICL8038 made by Intersil of Cupertino, California
  • the square wave, sawtooth or sine wave output of device 1200 is provided to the negative input of isolation amplifier 1204, the positive input of which is grounded.
  • amplifier 1204 issues output SIGOUT.
  • Proper biasing of the negative input of isolation amplifier 1204 is provided by biasing circuit 1206.
  • Device 1200 is provided, at terminal 8 thereof, with a frequency-controlling input OSREF originating in a potentiometer 496 connected in a voltage-divider arrangement with voltage-dividing resistors 498 and 500 (see Figure 9C).
  • signal OSREF is a frequency-controlling input resulting from operator actuation of adjustment knob P 3 in operator control section 450 ( Figure 9A), by which the operator adjusts the horizontal speed of scanning of mirrors 14. This effect is achieved by application of the input OSREF as a frequency-controlling input to the device 1200.
  • reference voltage inputs +VREF and -VREF are provided to supply voltage input terminals V CC and V EE , respectively, of the device 1200, the latter terminals also being connected to respective supply voltage circuits 1200 and 1212.
  • Portion L11 is provided with ganged switches SN connected to the terminal 10 input of device 1200.
  • Figures 11A through 11D and 11G are detailed logic block diagrams and circuit schematics of the interface 30 of the CEOG system of Figure 2.
  • Figures 11E, 11F and 11H are timing diagrams of the write (data out) sequence, read (data in) sequence and interrupt sequence, respectively, relating to the operation of the interface 30 of the CEOG system of Figure 2.
  • tristate buffers 1230, 1232 and 1234 are provided, each of which is responsive to input signal Specifically, when goes “low,” each of tristate buffers 1230, 1232 and 1234 is actuated so that a prewired address (for example, in the preferred embodiment, address 000,154) in the processor 34 ( Figure 2) passes through the tristate buffers 1230, 1232 and 1234 to outputs DAT0-DAT15.
  • a prewired address for example, in the preferred embodiment, address 000,154
  • tristate buffers 1230, 1232 and 1234 appear as an open circuit to output terminals DAT0-DAT15, and as a result data from DAT0-DAT9 (from processor 34 of Figure 2) is provided to the arrangement of Figure 11B.
  • DAT0-DAT9 from processor 34 of Figure 2
  • outputs DAT10-DAT15 are not active.
  • Tristate buffers 1230, 1232 and 1234 are, in the preferred embodiment, SN74LS365 devices (manufactured by Texas Instruments).
  • bus transceiver devices 1240-1243 receive and respond to input
  • data DAT0-DAT15 passes through internal inverter 1246 (shown, for illustrative purposes, in device 1240 only) to terminals (the latter terminals representing a common data bus to the computer processor 34 ( Figure 2)), and data passes through inverter 1247 to output terminals DAL0-DAL15.
  • Output terminals DAL0-DAL11 are connected as inputs to tristate buffers 1244 and 1245, which are responsive to input More specifically, when goes “low,” inputs DAL0-DAL11 are passed through to outputs DTOA0-DTOA11, the latter (as will be recalled from above) providing inputs to the DAC circuitry in converter stage 56 ( Figure 2). Conversely, when goes “high,” tristate buffers 1244 and 1245 are open-circuited, thus precluding any output DTOA0-DTOA11.
  • data is provided by the computer processor 34 ( Figure 2) via the computer bus , bus transceivers 1240-1243, tristate buffers 1244 and 1245, and output terminals DTOA0-DTOA11, to the DAC circuitry in converter stage 56 ( Figure 2).
  • control data (specifically, and are transmitted over the computer bus to further bus transceiver devices (not shown) -- identical to bus transceivers 1240-1243 -- so as to produce at the output thereof corresponding control data DOUT, DIN, SYNC, WTBT, IAKI , BS7 and INIT.
  • control data are utilized in a manner to be described below.
  • bus transceivers 1240-1243 are, in the preferred embodiment, bus transceivers. Model No. DM8838 (manufactured by National Semiconductors).
  • tristate buffers 1244 and 1245 are, in the preferred embodiment, buffer devices SN74LS365 (manufactured by Texas Instruments).
  • interface 30 ( Figure 2) further comprises tristate buffer devices 1250-1253 and latch circuit 1254.
  • device 1250 responds to going “low,” to pass data DAL8-DAL13 (the outputs of bus transceiver devices 1240 and 1241, respectively, of Figure 11B, just discussed above) to output terminals DOUT8-DOUT13.
  • DAL8-DAL13 the outputs of bus transceiver devices 1240 and 1241, respectively, of Figure 11B, just discussed above
  • the latter outputs are derived indirectly from the corresponding inputs (provided via the computer bus -- Figure 11B) to bus transceiver devices 1240 and 1241, and in particular are control bits 8-13 in a control word register (to be discussed below).
  • control bits 8-13 in a control word register
  • Tristate buffer 1251 responds to (a "Group 1" strobe) going “low,” to connect outputs DAT10-DAT15 to ground, thus creating “low” (zero) output conditions at DAT10-DAT15. It is to be noted that goes “low” whenever analog-to-digital converted data (from converter stage 56 to Figure 2 ) is to be entered in the processor 34. Referring back to Figure 6A, since converters A/D1-A/D5 provide 10 bits of data
  • tristate buffer 1251 performs the necessary function of inserting leading zeros into the most significant six bit positions (DAT10-DAT15). Referring back to Figure 11B, it will be recalled that goes “low, " when data input to the computer is to be achieved. Accordingly, DAT0-DAT15 from tristate buffers 1250-1252 are passed through devices 1240-1243 to the computer bus
  • tristate buffer 1252 responds to (a "status in” strobe) going “low,” to pass data DATIN9-DATIN14, provided by logic section 62 (of Figures 2 and 10A-100), to outputs DAT9-DAT14.
  • the latter is provided to the computer bus via devices 1240 and 1241 ( Figure 11B), as previously
  • tristate buffer 1252 blocks transfer of data.
  • Latch circuit 1254 responds to STROB0 (a "control register” strobe) to strobe data DAL0-DAL4 (received from processor 34 of Figure 2 via the computer bus and devices 1242 and 1243 of Figure 11B) in latch circuit 1254.
  • Tristate buffer 1253 responds to (a "status register” strobe) going “low,” to send data DAL0-DAL4 latched by device 1254 to outputs DAT0-DAT4, the latter being provided to the computer bus via devices 1242 and 1243 of Figure 11B.
  • tristate buffer 1253 receives input DOSAMP (a "write busy” signal set in the logic whenever a write operation is to be performed), and provides DOSAMP to output DAT15 in response to going “low.” When goes “high,” tristate buffer 1253 blocks transfer of data therethrough.
  • DOSAMP a "write busy” signal set in the logic whenever a write operation is to be performed
  • Figure 11D illustrates the read/write decoding and control circuitry in interface 30 of Figure 2, and will now be explained in conjunction with timing diagrams Figures HE and 11F, respectively.
  • inverters 1270-1273 receive inputs DAL12, DAL10, DAL9, DAL8 and DAL7, respectively, from the circuitry of Figure 11B.
  • NAND gate 1274 receives inputs BS7, DAL15, DAL14, DAL13 and the outputs of inverters 1270-1273, and decodes these inputs so as to derive a logic one output whenever inputs (address line inputs) DAL7-10, DAL12-15 indicate a predetermined block of addresses in processor 34 ( Figure 2).
  • inputs DAL7-DAL10 and DAL12-DAL15 indicate address blocks 164, Oxx or 164, lxx.
  • DAL0-DAL17 are address inputs from the processor 34 of Figure 2, and -- when the various DAL bits have the values shown in Table 1 (below) -- corresponding address blocks are indicated.
  • NAND gate 1284 the other input of which receives the decoder output of NAND gate 1274.
  • the arrangement of Figure HD also includes latch circuit 1292 which receives computer-generated addresses DAL1-DAL6 from the arrangement of Figure 11B.
  • Latch 1292 is strobed by NAND gate 1294 whenever either of flip-flops 1276 and 1286 are set.
  • WTBT ( Figure 11E) goes
  • NAND gate 1294 goes “high,” preferably within a maximum of 14 nanoseconds after AND gate 1280 has gone “high.” As indicated earlier, the "high" output of NAND gate 1294 strobes address data (from the processor 34 of Figure 2) into latch 1292.
  • NAND gate 1298 performs an AND operation with respect to inputs DOUT and RDYWRIT, and the output of NAND gate 1298 is provided -- via NAND gate 1300 (which performs an OR operation) -- to trigger one-shot device 1302.
  • One-shot device 1302 issues a short (preferably, one microsecond) negative pulse, the trailing edge of which triggers flip-flop 1304.
  • the Q output of flip-flop 1304 is provided to NAND gate 1306, the other input of which receives the inverted (via inverter 1308) output of NAND gate 1298.
  • NAND gate 1306 performs an AND operation with respect to the inputs thereto so as to issue a negative pulse, the leading edge of which triggers further one-shot device 1310.
  • the output of NAND gate 1306 is designated and this output is provided as one input to NAND gate 1312 which performs an OR operation with respect thereto.
  • the output of NAND gate 1312 is provided, via inverter 1314, as a strobe input to decoder 1316 which, at its A-C inputs, receives address inputs ADDR4-ADDR6 from latch 1292.
  • the further address outputs ADDR1-ADDR3 of latch 1292 are provided directly to a further decoder 1318 which is strobed (at its D input) by the Q 0 output of decoder 1316.
  • decoder 1316 as a result of the
  • ADDR4-ADDR6 inputs thereto and -- creates groups of strobe signals and Outputs are provided to corresponding decoders 192, 194 and 196 ( Figure 6C), wherein a decoding operation takes place so as to generate further appropriate strobe inputs STROBN for use in the DAC circuitry ( Figure 6E) of converter stage 56 ( Figure 2).
  • Output from decoder 1316 is provided to further decoder 1318, which also receives address inputs ADDR1-ADDR3 from latch 1292.
  • decoder 1318 As a result of its operation, decoder 1318 generates output (via amplifier 1320), output STROBO (a "control word” strobe generated via inverters 1322 and 1324 and NAND gate 1326), and output (a "status word” strobe).
  • the circuitry of Figure 11D decodes the address line inputs DAL1-DAL6, and generates the various groups of strobe signals (GRPOSTB, GRP1STB, GRP2STB and GRP3STB) which are variously sent to the logic section 62 ( Figures 2 and 6A-6E).
  • These groups of strobe signals insure that the computer processor 34 ( Figure 2) retrieves the proper data from, or stores the proper data in, proper address locations in memory, while properly timing the various transfer and analog-to-digital (or digital-to-analog) conversion functions. It will be recalled that the leading edge of the output of NAND gate 1306 triggered one-shot 1310.
  • flip-flop 1338 The Q output of flip-flop 1338 is accordingly a negative pulse which -- via NAND gate 1340 and inverter 1342 -- causes output to go "low,” the latter being provided to the computer processor 34 ( Figure 2) via the computer bus.
  • NAND gate 1340 also receives -- generated by the circuitry of Figure 11G during device (i.e., CEOG system) interrupt of the computer -- and performs an OR operation so that goes “low” either upon the occurrence of the Q negative pulse output of flip-flop 1338 or upon going “low.”
  • input DOUT (received via the computer bus, as explained above in discussion of Figure 11B) goes “low” (see the timing diagram of Figure 11E), so that the output of NAND gate 1300 goes “low.”
  • This "low” signal passes through NAND gate 1356 (acting as an OR gate) and inverter 1358 to reset flip-flops 1304 and 1338, resulting in output going "high” (or RPLY going “low”) -- see the timing diagram of Figure 11E.
  • signal SYNC also goes “low,” and the write (data out) sequence is completed.
  • Time lapse T 1A is preferably 75 nanoseconds at the minimum; T 1B is preferablly 66 nanoseconds maximum (including a 20 nanosecond set-up time); T 2A is preferably 25 nanoseconds minimum; T 3A is preferably 14 nanoseconds maximum; T 4A is preferably 25 nanoseconds minimum; T 5A is preferably 190 nanoseconds minimum; T 5B is preferably 220 nanoseconds minimum; and T 6 is preferably 120 nanoseconds maximum (typically, 60 nanoseconds).
  • the above preferred time durations are based on the particular hardware utilized in the preferred embodiment of the CEOG system, as discussed above with respect to Figures 11A-11D.
  • a read (data input to the computer) operation takes place as follows.
  • the computer generates address inputs DAL(N), which inputs are provided to latch 1292 of Figure 11D.
  • the computer processor 34 Figure 2) further generates SYNC which is provided as a strobe input to flip-flop 1286 (the Ready Read flip-flop). This strope (SYNC) sets flip-flop 1286 if its D input is a logic one on the leading edge of SYNC.
  • AND gate 1290 provides a logic one at the D input of flip-flop 1286 in response to detection of the desired address block (so long as BS7 is logic 1
  • NAND gate 1344 performs an AND operation with respect to inputs RDYREAD (from flip-flop 1286) and DIN (indicating that the computer is ready to receive input data) so as to generate DIN is provided to NAND gate 1344 via an RC (delay) network -- resistor 1346 and capacitor 1348 -- so as to insure a necessary time delay (preferably 60 nanoseconds) between the occurrence of SYNC and the leading edge of DIN. going "low” strobes decoder 1316 (via NAND gate 1312 and inverter 1314) so as to decode the inputs ADDR6-ADDR4 provided by latch 1292.
  • Decoders 1316 and 1318 function as previously described above to generate the groups of strobe signals and STROBO,
  • the signals generated by STROBEREAD each gate a particular set of data (e.g., STROB10 will gate data from channel 1 in the A/D section of Figure 6A) onto the data lines DAT0-DAT9.
  • lines DAT10-DAT15 will be zeroed by as shown in Figure 11C.
  • flip-flop 1304 is AND'ed with STROBEREAD in NAND gate 1350 to produce the signal that sets flip-flop 1338 via its S input. goes “low” in response to setting of flip-flop 1338, the latter acting via its Q output, NAND gate 1340 and inverter 1342.
  • Inverter 1354 is an open-collector device, which is to say that its output may be connected to other open-collector outputs which also generate (as seen later). It will be recalled that was used (in Figure 11B) to put data DAT0-DAT15 on the bus lines Once DIN goes “low,” STROBEREAD goes “low” (via the operation of NAND gate 1344 and inverter 1352). The reset (R) terminal of flip-flop 1338 will be accordingly enabled by NAND gates 1300 and 1356 (the latter of which performs an OR operation with respect to input ) and inverter 1358.
  • flip-flop 1338 will be reset, causing to go “high” via the operation of NAND gate 1340 and inverter 1342. Subsequently, the computer will cause SYNC to go “low, " and the read (data in) sequence will be completed.
  • Time durations disclosed therein are, in the preferred embodiment, as follows.
  • Time duration T 1F is preferably 54 nanoseconds maximum (in order to preclude a previous code (and thus, an erroneous code) from remaining in decoder 1316 of Figure 11B for too long a time duration);
  • T 2F is preferably 60 nanoseconds;
  • T 3F is preferably 83 nanoseconds; and
  • T 4F is preferably one microsecond.
  • the above-stated time durations are preferable based on the previously described circuitry of Figures 11A-11D.
  • Input is received by and sets flip-flop 1400 (the Data Ready flip-flop), while input DAL15 (the most significant bit from a control register to be described below) is received by and sets flip-flop 1402 (the Interrupt Enable flip-flop).
  • the Q outputs of flip-flops 1400 and 1402 are provided to NAND gate 1404 (which performs an AND operation), and the output thereof is provided -- via inverter 1406 -- as a clock input to set flip-flop 1408.
  • flip-flop 1408 The Q output of flip-flop 1408 is provided via inverter 1410 as output (see IRQ of the timing diagram of Figure 11H) . It is to be noted that flip-flop 1402 is clocked by STROBO generated by the circuitry of Figure 11D. is transmitted to the processor 34 as an "interrupt computer" command.
  • the circuitry of Figure 11G receives input IAKIN which (as mentioned above) is generated by a bus transceiver device similar to devices 1240-1243 of
  • Figure 11B in response to computer-generated input received over the computer bus.
  • IAKIN and the output of inverter 1406 are “high, " the output of NAND gate 1412 goes “low.”
  • Output is provided, via inverter 1414 and RC delay network 1416, to inverter 1418, the output of which is Accordingly, goes “low” in response to GATVEC going “low.”
  • going “low” causes (the output of inverter 1420, the input of which is connected to inverter 1414) to also go “low.”
  • flip-flop 1408 is reset in response to either going “low” or going “low,” such being accomplished via NAND gate 1409 and inverter 1411.
  • Resetting of the circuitry of Figure 11G is accomplished in response to either of three conditions: operation of a manual switch SWA (preferably, physically located in the interface 30) so as to reset the no-bounce switch 1424, resulting in generation of output via NAND gate 1426 (which performs an OR operation) and inverter 1428; INIT going "high,” as provided via inverter 1430 to NAND gate 1426; or turn-on of the system, activating a one second timer 1432 which provides an output via inverter 1434 to the NAND gate 1426 and inverter 1428.
  • a manual switch SWA preferably, physically located in the interface 30
  • input is connected, via an amplifier 1427 and a wired-OR connection, to one input of NAND gate 1426 so as to cause to go “low” in response to going "low,” thus achieving reset of the. circuitry of Figure 11G in response to resetting of the ADC circuitry in converter stage 56 ( Figure 2).
  • inverter 1430 which receives the input INIT
  • the output of inverter 1430 is connected to the input of amplifier 1436, the output of which produces (previously discussed above).
  • the circuitry of Figure 11G further comprises a flip-flop 1437 which is clocked by input STROBO, and set by input DAL14 -- the fourteenth bit of a control word register (to be discussed below) in computer processor 34 of Figure 2. As a result of being set, flip-flop 1437 generates a "low" output which is bit 15 in a status word register (also to be discussed below) .
  • the preferred embodiment of this invention includes a PDP 11/03 central processing unit as processor 34, a UT-52 terminal as display 38/keyboard 44, an RXV-11 disk unit as floppy disk 42, and the RT-11 software package as computer programs 36 (the latter being readily available from Digital Equipment Corporation).
  • the circuitry of Figures 11A-11G constitutes an addition to the memory locations of the computer. A summary of the additions is shown in Table 2 (below).
  • control word register (mentioned in Table 2 ) is a 16-bit, write-only register, organized from bit 15 through bit 0, as follows:
  • Bit 15 Interrupt Enable bit -- this bit will be reset whenever the logic section 62 ( Figures 10A-10O) or the computer processor 34 ( Figure 2) initializes the system. Otherwise, it is set/reset by the computer programs (software) 36. This bit is actually generated -- in the preferred embodiment -- by flip-flop 1402 in Figure 11G.
  • Bit 14 A "single step" bit provided to the ADC in converter 56 ( Figure 2). This bit is generated -- in the preferred embodiment -- by flip-flop 1437 and results in generation of signal CMPSAMP (via data bit DAL14 of Figure 11G), which is one of the signals which generates SAMPLE (see Figure 6D), the latter being utilized (it will be recalled) in the analog-to-digital conversion process
  • DOUT13 to the arrangement of Figure 10 J so as to cause generation of signal 5MSSAMP, calls for the generation of data at the rate of one sample point (six channels) every 5 milliseconds. It will be recalled that DOUT13 turns on flip-flop 970, triggering one-shot 978, so as to generate 5MSSAMP.
  • Bit 12 A Flash bit is provided, as input DOUT12 (CMPSHTR), to flip-flop 1022 of Figure 10L, so as to generate output SHUT, resulting in pulsing of the flasher 70.
  • Bit 11 A 2.5 Millisecond Sample bit is provided as input DOUTH to flip-flop 972 of Figure 10J. Flip-flop 972 accordingly -- via its Q output -- enables relay (solenoid/switch) 982, so as to adjust the timing of one-shot 980. As a result, the sampling time is decreased from 5 milliseconds to 2.5 milliseconds.
  • Bit 10 A bit DOUT10 is provided to flip-flop 1020 of Figure 10L, to set that flip-flop. As a result, flip-flop 1020 -- via its Q output -- generates output RECORDING. When RECORDING goes “low,” display indicator DS9 of Figures 9A and 9B is illuminated thus indicating that the system is in the "recording" mode of operation. Bit 9: A Copy bit, which causes the hard-copy printer 40 ( Figure 2) to make a printout of test results. Bits 8-0: Bits 5-8 are "spare" bits available for use in accomplishing other functions or display indications, as would be judged by one of ordinary skill in the art to be necessary with respect to the CEOG system.
  • bits 0-4 -- it will be noted -- are stored in latch circuit 1254 of Figure 11C as written thereinto by STROBO. Thus, these bits may be read back by the computer processor 34 through tristate buffer 1253, as enabled by STROBl.
  • the status word register is a 16-bit, read-only register, organized from bit 15 through bit 0, as follows:
  • Bit 15 A Write Busy bit, which must be checked before the computer writes a word into any of the registers (except for the control register). If bit 15 is "on,” this indicates that the CEOG system is involved in storing a word transmitted by the computer processor 34 ( Figure 2) during the last "write” command. In the preferred embodiment, bit 15 is provided by flip-flop 1437 of Figure 11G. It is to be noted that output of flip-flop 1437 becomes computer input DAT15 via tristate buffer 1253 of Figure 11C. Bit 14: A Stripe-On bit indicating that the stripe cage 76 in optokinetic device 16 is turning.
  • switch Sll Figures 9A and 9C -- when turned on by the operator -- and is provided to the computer processor 34 -- via NAND gate 912, inverter 918, NAND gate 924 and inverter 928 of portion L4 of Figure 10H -- as input DATIN14.
  • Bit 12 A Copy Busy bit, indicating that the hard-copy printer 40 ( Figure 1) is busy printing from the last command.
  • Bits 11-0 These bits are indicated as spare bits, but can be utilized for providing various other control functions/display indicators as would be obvious to one of ordinary skill in the art.
  • the Data-in registers are made up of the above-specified (Table 2) I/O addresses, which correspond to respective channels 1-8 of information.
  • digital channel 1 corresponding to analog input AMPOUTl
  • channel 2 contains right vertical eye movement test data
  • channel 3 contains left horizontal eye movement test data
  • channel 4 contains right horizontal eye movement test data
  • channels 5 and 6 contain VER test data
  • channel 7 correspond to analog input TACH2
  • channel 8 contains cage speed test data.
  • Data Out channels 1-8 (referred to in Table 2 above) include digital data 'from the computer processor 34 of Figure 2 for conversion in converter stage 56.
  • Discussion of channels 5-8 is eliminated as not being critical to the full disclosure of this invention; however, it will be obvious to one of ordinary skill in the art that channels 5-8 could be utilized for the development of various other analog functions.
  • the Move X register (referred to in Table 2) is a 16-bit, write-only register, organized (in the preferred embodiment) as follows: Bit 10: Go X mirror -- instructs the mirrors 14 (and associated driving circuitry) to begin scanning in the X direction with its own sine wave. See input DOUT10 to flip-flop 1020 in Figure 10L, resulting in generation of XSINE. Bit 11: The CMPSINE bit which instructs the mirrors 14 that the computer processor 34 is to control the X deflection of the mirrors 14 so that the 10 least significant bits of the MOVX register are in control of operation of the X-deflection mirrors.
  • Bit 12 The CMPSHTR bit which opens the shutter 66 ( Figure 2) to allow the light from laser 12 to pass therethrough, usually used in conjunction with bits 10 or 11 above. See input DOUT12 (CMPSHTR) applied to flip-flop 1022 in Figure 10L, with resultant generation of SHUT by NPN transistor 1036.
  • Bit 13 YSCAN bit which causes the Y-deflection mirrors to scan -- similar to Bit 10 except that it controls scanning in the Y direction. See input YSCAN to amplifier 1110 in Figure 10M, with subsequent generation of mirror driving output YDRIVE.
  • Bits 0-9 These 10 bits are provided by the processor 34 -- via interface 30 -- to converter stage 56 ( Figure 2). Specifically, in the preferred embodiment, bits 0-9 are provided as inputs DTOA0-DTOA9 to circuitry of the type illustrated as DAC circuitry 300 of Figure 6E, the data being strobed into latch circuits 302 and 303 by a strobe input STROBMX (similar to STROBN) .
  • the digital data is digital- to-analog converted to develop analog output MOVX (similar to BIASN of Figure 6E), thus providing an analog voltage (preferably, having a value of from -5 volts (000...000) to +5 volts
  • Position X register (referred to in Table 2) is a read-only register which feeds back (to the computer processor 34 of Figure 2) information relative to the position of the X-scaiming mirrors 14. The 10 least significant bits of this register give the relative X position of the mirrors. However, in the preferrred embodiment, either the Go bit or the single-step bit (both of which were referred to above) must be turned on, and an interrupt received, before the 10 least significant bits of the Position X register contain up-to-date data. (This is true of all the outputs of A/D converters 56' of Figure 6A).
  • the Move Y register is a write-only register used for controlling scanning of the mirrors 14 in the Y direction.
  • the 10 least significant bits (0-9) of this register are D/A converted -- in the same manner as described above for bits 0-10 controlling X direction scanning -- to form MOVY, an analog voltage which operates in conjunction with the Y position potentiometer (under the control of the operator) -- see Figures 9A-9E -- to move the Y-deflection mirrors. See potentiometer 504 in circuit 502 of Figure 9C.
  • Position Y register is a read-only register, the 10 least significant bits of which give the relative Y position of the mirrors 14. As was the case with the Postion X register, either the Go bit or the single-step bit must be on, and an interrupt received, before the 10 least significant bits of the Position Y register have up-to-date data contained therein.
  • the CEOG system address decoding scheme is set forth in Table 3 (below). It is to be noted that, in the preferred embodiment, memory locations 164,000 through 164,176 are not true memory locations in processor 34 ( Figure 2).
  • locations 164,000-164,016 include the control word register, status word register, and chair control register, and addressing of these locations is accomplished by the decoding NAND gate 1274, decoders 1316, 1318, etc. of Figure 11D (previously described) which produce STROB0, STROB1, etc. to send data to the proper address.
  • locations 164,020-164,036 are channels 1-8 of data input from the CEOG system to the processor 34, such data input being, of course, analog-to-digital converted prior to input.
  • Locations 164,040-164,056 are channels 1-8 of data output from the processor 34 to the CEOG system, such data output being, of course, digital-to-analog converted after output.
  • locations 164,060-164,076 are the Move X register, Position X register, Move Y register, and Position Y register (previously discussed above).
  • address. data bits D6-D0 represent the seven least significant bits of a data address for addressing any one of the locations 164,000-164,076. It is to be noted that since, in the preferred embodiment, only alternate locations
  • bits D6-D1 correspond to address line inputs DAL6-DAL1 provided as data address line inputs provided by the computer bus to bus transceiver devices 1240-1243 of Figure 11B (discussed above), and further correspond to inputs ADDR6-ADDR1 provided to decoders 1316 and 1381 of Figure HB (also discussed above).
  • strobe signals GRPOSTB, GRPISTB, GRP2STB and GRP3STB are developed -- specifically, STROBO-STROB7, STROB10-STROB17, STROB20-STROB27 and STROB30-STROB37.
  • the CEOG system of Figure 2 includes a processor 34 which is preferably software-controlled by computer programs 36.
  • computer programs 36 preferably use the RT-11 software package (provided by Digital Equipment Corporation for use with the preferred processor unit PDP11/03).
  • Figures 12A and 12B are general flowcharts of the test program and analysis program, respectively, implemented by the processor 34 of the CEOG system of Figure 2, as a preferred implementation of computer programs 36. That is, computer programs 36 of Figure 2 are divided into a Run program ( Figure 12A) by means of which various selected tests are performed on the patient, and an Analysis program ( Figure 12B) by means of which the test results are analyzed/processed and a display or hard copy of the test results in a convenient format is provided to the test administrator.
  • Figures 12A and 12B Prior to discussion of Figures 12A and 12B, a few additional introductory comments are appropriate.
  • RUN TEST calls up the test process for presenting the stimulus to the patient and recording the patient's reaction
  • RUN ANALYSIS calls up the analysis process, by which the patient's reaction is analyzed and recorded on the patient's record
  • RUN REVIEW calls up the review process, by which the patient's record is reviewed, a directory of patients processed can be displayed, and a hard copy replication of the patient's records can be made.
  • the processor 34 is preferably programmed to provide the operator (test administrator) with the capacility of choosing which of the three processes (test, analysis or review) to enter by means of entry of an appropriate alphabetical character (e.g., T, A or R) on the keyboard 44 ( Figure 2).
  • an appropriate alphabetical character e.g., T, A or R
  • test process will be commenced by loading the system and data disks, and "booting" the system -- block 1500 of Figure 12A.
  • the present data (such as the present date) is then entered into the computer's file record -- block 1501.
  • the test process is formally commenced by starting the system (e.g., by typing RUN SYS on the keyboard 44 of Figure 2) -- block 1502.
  • a display of a patient data form on display device 38 ( Figure 2) will then occur -- block 1503.
  • the test administrator then enters various patient information (such as name, ID, etc.) onto the data form from the keyboard 44 -- block 1504.
  • test menu -- block 1505 Upon completion of patient data input, the system displays a test menu -- block 1505 -- such as the following:
  • T time scale -- follow with 5, 7.5, 10. 12:5, 15, 17.5 or 20 seconds -- otherwise time scale is 2.5 seconds.
  • T time scale: follow with 5, 7.5, 10, 12.5, 15, 17.5 or 20 seconds; otherwise, time scale is 2.5 seconds.
  • T time scale: follow with 5, 7.5, 10, 12.5, 15, 17.5 or 20 seconds; otherwise, time scale is 2.5 seconds.
  • T time scale: follow with 5, 7.5, 10, 12.5, 15, 17.5 or 20 seconds; otherwise, time scale is 2.5 seconds.
  • Lower rotating drum by operator control section 450 of Figure 9A).
  • turn potentiometer adjustment knob P2 in Figure 9A
  • TP perform three revolutions of the drum for the pattern test.
  • T time scale: follow with 5, 7.5, 10, 12.5, 15, 17.5 or 20 seconds; otherwise, time scale is 2.5 seconds.
  • L rotate chair left: take horizontal data at end.
  • RHV rotate chair right: take horizontal and vertical data at end.
  • LHV rotate chair left: take horizontal and vertical data at end. It is to be noted, that, in the chair rotation test, data may be taken during rotation and also after the chair has stopped.
  • the chair Presuming that oscillation -- block 1516 -- has been chosen, the chair will be automatically oscillated for four cycles, and data will be taken during chair motion.
  • the procedure is preferably as follows:
  • T time scale: follow with 5, 7.5, 10, 12.5, 15, 17.5 or 20 seconds; otherwise, time scale is 2.5 seconds.
  • Blinking letter (on display 38 of Figure 2) indicates next test to be done in the normal VER sequence.
  • B8 both eyes open, 128 flashes, one per second.
  • B4 both eyes open, 64 flashes, one per second.
  • R4 right eye occluded, 64 flashes, one per second.
  • L4 left eye occluded, 64 flashes, one per second.
  • T(f,r) test VER using number of flashes f (f is 16, 32, 64 or 128) and flashes per second r (r is 1/2, 1 or 2).
  • M(m) on display, choose magnification factor m.
  • test administrator is required by the test program to provide parameters (such as chair rotation speed via potentiometer adjustment knob PI of Figure 9A, etc.)
  • parameters such as chair rotation speed via potentiometer adjustment knob PI of Figure 9A, etc.
  • the administration of pursuit tests, chair motion tests and visual evoked response (VER) tests which previously were relatively inefficient in their administration -- can be very quickly and efficiently performed.
  • VER visual evoked response
  • the integrated CEOG system of the present invention is highly flexible in that, as previously discussed and described in great detail above, the test administrator always has the option of manually administering one or more of the particular tests by manipulation of the various controls in operator control section 450 of Figure 9A.
  • immediate display of the test results in either mode of operation -- automated or manual test administration -- immediate display of the test results, in a graphical format readily usable by the attending test administrator or physician, is provided (as illustrated on display device 38 of Figure 1).
  • the administrator or physician is able to: (1) determine immediately if the test has been properly administered, (2) determine whether or not the patient has validly received/reacted to the test stimuli presented, and (3) thus, determine whether further testing (or repeated testing) is necessary.
  • Header information is read from the disk 42 ( Figure 1) -- block 1550.
  • Header information is displayed -- block 1551.
  • N is compared to zero (block 1557); then, if N is equal to or greater than zero, the Nth record is obtained from the disk (block 1559), while if N is less than zero, a further decision (block 1558) is made. Specifically, if -1 is equal to or less than N, the system returns to START (block 1550), while if -1 is greater than N, the system stops. Once the Nth record from disk is obtained
  • VER -- block 1561 the system displays two channels with labels and scaling -- block 1563 -- and enters a "print" routine (to be subsequently discussed).
  • test is a pursuit test
  • mirror position H or V
  • chair rotation is called for
  • chair motor speed is displayed -- block 1566 --
  • print routine the following procedure applies:
  • the "group size” is printed -- block 1567.
  • the print routine would be entered if the test question was a VER test (see discussion above).
  • the system prints the message "position point and its disposition" -- block 1569.
  • the system displays a cursor -- block 1570.
  • the operator enters one of three alphabetic characters: S, E or F -- block 1571.
  • group size is made -- block 1573. If group size equals 1, the system prints the message "enter label” (block 1574), the operator enters a character (block 1575), the system displays the label so entered (block 1576 ) , and the system returns to "display cursor" (block 1570).
  • the channel information is saved, and initiate next channel is executed -- block 1580 -- followed by a decision (block 1581) as to whether the channel is less than, equal to or greater than 4. If the channel is equal to or less than 4, a return to "display cursor" (block 1570) is executed.
  • the system computes and displays times and velocities (block 1582), and prints the message "save?" (block 1583).
  • Test program of Figure 12A and Analysis program of Figure 12B are implemented by various computer programs 36 ( Figure 1) -- preferably, a master control program, individual test programs for the respective EOG and VER tests, and individual main analysis programs for the respective EOG and VER tests. More specifically, the computer programs 36 of
  • Figure 1 are implemented, in the preferred embodiment, by the following: a master control and stored format (for printout) program; a program for calling forms for display; an EOG test program; a VER test program; a main analysis program (for EOG test analysis); a main analysis program (for VER test analysis); and a display program.

Landscapes

  • Health & Medical Sciences (AREA)
  • Life Sciences & Earth Sciences (AREA)
  • Medical Informatics (AREA)
  • Biophysics (AREA)
  • Pathology (AREA)
  • Engineering & Computer Science (AREA)
  • Biomedical Technology (AREA)
  • Heart & Thoracic Surgery (AREA)
  • Physics & Mathematics (AREA)
  • Molecular Biology (AREA)
  • Surgery (AREA)
  • Animal Behavior & Ethology (AREA)
  • General Health & Medical Sciences (AREA)
  • Public Health (AREA)
  • Veterinary Medicine (AREA)
  • Psychiatry (AREA)
  • Psychology (AREA)
  • Ophthalmology & Optometry (AREA)
  • Eye Examination Apparatus (AREA)

Abstract

A computerized electro-oculographic system has a rotatable subject chair (2) surrounded by a cylindrical screen (18) on which the desired optical stimuli from projectors (12, 16) are displayed. Eye movement signals are picked up by electrodes (6a-1) amplified (24, 26), calibrated (46), filtered (26) and digitized (28) for interface (30) with a computer (32). The tests to be run are selected by a keyboard (44) to operate the computer according to its programs (36). The computer signals are then displayed (38) and/or recorded (40, 42).

Description

Description Computerized Electro-Oculographic (CEOG) System
Technical Field
The present invention relates to a computerized electro-oculographic system and, more particularly, an integrated system for automated administration of electro-oculographic tests and visual evoked response tests to a patient, and automated processing of results derived from such tests. Automated administration of the tests is conducted either under the direct control of the test administrator via an operator control section (console), or under the automated control of a programmed computer with indirect control by the test administrator. Background Art
For a number of years, electro-oculographic (or electro-nystagmographic) techniques have been utilized by physicians to gain useful information about a patient with certain complaints -- notably, complaints of disturbed equilibrium. Such information has typically been gained by observing the patient's eye movements during certain kinds of visual and vestibular stimulation. At times, such observations provide the only physical findings that support a patient's complaint, and they also assist the physician in defining the anatomic location of the patient's disorder. For example, by observing eye movements, the physician is often able to distinguish between a peripheral vestibular disorder and one located within the central nervous system, and is sometimes able to lateralize a peripheral disorder, or to further localize a central nervous system disorder. In early times, the physician examined eye movements merely by watching the patient's eyes. However, important signs were often missed because the physician could not prevent the patient from fixating, and visual fixation has a powerful suppressive effect on some types of nystagmus. Moreover, certain types of brain lesions and certain drugs impair or abolish the visual suppression effect; this phenomenon cannot be appreciated unless nystagmus is observed both when visual fixation is allowed and when it is denied.
A number of methods were available to overcome the latter disadvantages, but the one best suited to the needs of physicians has been electro-oculography. Electro-oculography has long been widely used for research purposes in psychology and ophthalmology. It has gradually acquired its more familiar name, electro-nystagmography, because of its extensive application to the study of nystagmus (although it is used to record other types of eye movements as well). Basically, electro-nystagmography (ENG) owes its existence to the fact that the eye is, in effect, a battery, the cornea being a positive pole, the retina being a negative pole, and the potential difference between the two poles being normally at least one millivolt. This electrical potential creates, in the front of the head, an electrical field that changes its orientation as the eyeballs rotate. These electrical changes can be detected by electrodes placed on the skin of a patient, and, when the changes are amplified and used to drive a writing instrument, a trace of the eye position is obtained.
As stated in the Manual of Electro-nystagmography by Barber and Stockwell (St. Louis: The C. V. Mosby Company, 1976), electrodes can be arranged on the skin in a number of ways, but a standard technique for clinical purposes involves placement of two electrodes bitemporally (that is, one on the right temple and the other on the left temple) to monitor horizontal eye position, placement of a second pair of electrodes, one above and the other below one of the eyes, to monitor vertical position of the eyes, and placement of an additional electrode, usually on the forehead, to serve as a ground or reference point. Of course, other arrangements of electrodes can be utilized, as are known in the art (for example, an occipital arrangement).
A significant problem in the prior art, relating to the monitoring of eye movements using such electrode arrangements, results from the necessity, or at least desirability, of maintaining a constant relationship between the center position of the eye and a given value of the measured electrical parameter (for example, zero volts). Typically, sustained use of such electrode arrangements and measuring devices results in the development of an offset voltage. That is, the calibration of the measuring device varies so that a center position of the eye no longer results in a reading of zero volts, but rather results in some finite number of volts (referred to as the offset voltage). This has obvious disadvantages with respect to the accuracy of the eye movement measurements.
Inasmuch as such electrode measurement devices are usually equipped with an amplifying stage (or preamplifiers, as the case may be), prior art techniques for zero-adjusting, or biasing, the amplifier arrangement so as to eliminate the offset voltage have been limited to manual techniques. Whereas such manual techniques have been an improvement, they have two major disadvantages. Firstly, such techniques amount to broad-range (coarse) adjustments, at best, and thus do not achieve the narrow-range (fine) adjustments necessary for maximum accuracy in measurements. Secondly, such manual techniques -- even if performed on a regular basis -- cannot compare with the additional efficiency achieved by continuous, automatic zero-adjustment to eliminate the offset voltage. As previously mentioned, the placement of small electrodes on the head of the patient makes it possible to record ocular motility. Specifically, electro-oculograms representing measurement of both horizontal and vertical eye movements -- and occipital measurements as well -- are recorded with the electrodes fixed to the head of the patient. Thus, eye movements and visual responses from the patient can be recorded as the patient undergoes one or more tests. Typically, a series of six ocular motor, vestibular and response tests are conducted, as follows:
(1) Gaze tests -- wherein eye movements are recorded as the patient looks straight ahead, to the right, to the left, up and down, both with the eyes open and closed.
(2) Saccadic tests -- wherein eye movements are recorded as the patient follows a jumping light spot.
(3) Tracking tests -- wherein eye movements are recorded as the patient follows a uniformly moving light spot.
(4) Optokinetic tests -- wherein eye movements are recorded as the patient watches vertical stripes moving at various speeds to the right, and then to the left, the test being performed both with the patient stationary while the image revolves, and with the patient revolving while the image is stationary.
(5) Caloric tests -- wherein each ear is irrigated twice, once with air above body temperature and once with air below body temperature, the irrigation affecting the vestibular sensors and producing horizontal nystagmus.
(6) Visual evoked response tests -- wherein "vision" is assessed, the integrity of the visual pathways (including the optic nerve, optic chiasm, and posterior visual pathways) being analyzed, and the visual evoked response being recorded between occipital electrodes (positioned contralateral to the eye -- i.e., electrodes on the right/left occipital, and electrodes on the right/left ear lobe), as stimulated by a burst of short, high-intensity light pulses, and a reference (ground) electrode (placed on the forehead of the patient). Whereas it is known in the art to administer such tests, such tests have typically been performed in a piecemeal manner by one or more physicians or attendants, operating with various separate and non-integrated components. For example, one device might be utilized to perform the saccadic test, followed by a period of time during which a second piece of equipment is actuated in order to perform the tracking test, and so forth for the remaining tests. Moreover, one group of equipment (light flasher or light scanning equipment) might be utilized for administration of the saccadic and tracking tests, and then a second group of equipment (an optokinetic device in combination with a rotating chair) might be utilized to perform the optokinetic test. The lack of availability of an integrated system for performing these various tests, with the various and different types of equipment, has resulted in both time inefficiencies in the administration of such tests, and more importantly inaccuracy in the statistical data obtained.
Moreover, data obtained as a result of the above-mentioned tests typically include artifacts caused by electronic noise, eye blinks, random eye movements, poor electrode contact, and so forth. In the typical system, wherein minute voltage changes (as little as several microvolts per degree of eye displacement) are amplified many thousands of times, distortion of the statistics is a very real problem. For example, the previously mentioned "offset voltage" phenomenon encountered in electrode measuring arrangements of the type employed with such systems is a major contributor to statistical inaccuracy.
Finally, in the typical prior art system, wherein electrode-measured data is -- after amplification -- recorded directly on a recording device, there is always the possibility of inaccuracies resulting from either the generation of extraneous signals or improper calibration of the recording equipment. As a result, raw data -- no matter how accurately measured and obtained -- can be distorted by such extraneous signals and/or inherent lack of calibration of the recording equipment, and the actual data -- once erroneously recorded -- is irretrievable and lost forever.
There has been some attempt in the prior art to overcome the latter disadvantages. In particular, there have evolved systems -- such as that disclosed by Robert W. Baloh et al in "Algorithm for Analyses of Saccadic Eye Movements Using a Digital Computer, " Aviation, Space and Environmental Medicine (May 1976), pp. 523 ff. -- wherein measured data corresponding to horizontal and vertical eye movements, and target, position, are -- after digitization -- recorded on magnetic tape. Then, at a later time, such digitized records are read into a computer equipped with a Saccade Analysis
Program (SAP) developed to analyze, in an off-line mode of operation, the saccadic eye movements previously recorded. Such systems can be equipped with not only a processor and memory, but also various peripheral units (disk drive, magnetic tape drive, graphics display terminal, and hard copy printer). Whereas such systems display the raw data for visual inspection and allow the user to study the data for possible errors in recording and/or digitization, it is important to note that such systems are nevertheless "off-line" systems whereby data is recorded in one operation and then processed in a second operation (on different equipment) separated by a time lapse there-between. Another type of prior art system is that exemplified by the disclosure of a "Method and Apparatus for Brain Waveform Examination" in U.S. Patent No. 3,893,450 - Ertl, issued on July 8, 1975. That patent discloses a method and apparatus for examining the brain waveform of a subject (for example, by electro-encephalographic (EEG) techniques) by providing a stimuli (such as light), and determining a characteristic of a mathematically determinable point in the brain waveforms of the subject (for example, by means of an EEG amplifier, filter, zero-crossing detector and computer). Upon making of such determination, the stimulation of the subject (for example, by a photo-stimulator) can be controlled or varied via a closed-loop feedback path (between, for example, the computer and the photo-stimulator). However, systems such as are represented by the latter patent do not provide a solution to most, if not all, of the problems discussed above. Thus, the system of the latter patent -- even though it provides for immediate processing of the brain waveform data, and resultant control of the photo-stimulation in accordance therewith -- does not comprise an integrated system capable of automated administration of various test stimuli to a patient via employment of an operator control section (console), does not provide for correction of the "offset voltage" phenomenon, and does not expressly provide for automated processing of resultant test data so as to provide critical information to the attending physician or test administrator in acceptable format and in a very short period of time.
In summary, there has been a need in the prior art for an integrated electro-oculographic system which not only provides for automated test administration (including control of test stimuli) to a patient, but also is capable of immediate recording and display of the raw data in real time, followed by rapid and accurate analysis of such raw data so as to provide the attendant or physician with critical information in an acceptable form and in a very short period of time. Disclosure of Invention
Therefore, according to the present invention, there is provided a computerized electro-oculographic (CEOG) system and, more particularly, an integrated CEOG system having the capabilities of automated administration of various electro-oculographc (EOG) and visual evoked response (VER) tests to a patient in response to operator selection of such tests, immediate on-line recording and display of test results (raw data), rapid and accurate analysis of such raw data in order to provide critical information to the test administrator in an acceptable form and in a very short period of time, and continuous/automatic data processing and "editing" to delete artifacts (typically, caused by electronic noise, eye blinks, random eye movements, poor electrode contact, etc.). The CEOG system of the present invention basically comprises the following components: a patient system, or test unit, including a rotating chair (for use, for example, in the administration of the optokinetic tests), various visual test stimuli devices (such as, for example, an optokinetic device, flasher, and light source), and respective control units for controlling both the rotating chair and the visual test stimuli devices; various input devices (preamplifier, amplifier, and digitizer) for receiving and providing electrode test data to a computer; a computer (including -- for example -- the usual central processing unit, storage media, display/keyboard and hard-copy printer), and an interface unit between the computer and the aforementioned control units and various input devices for facilitating control of test stimuli administration and input of test data, respectively. The integrated CEOG system of the present invention is capable of automated administration of test stimuli to a patient via the provision of an operator control section (console), by means of which the test administrator can select one of various types of stimuli (in accordance with the particular type of test being administrated), and can as well designate various parameters or characteristics of the desired stimuli. For example, the test administrator can operate the operator control section (console) to cause administration of optokinetic tests.
Specifically, the administrator can, in an automated manner, actuate both the rotatable chair (in terms of commanding rotation of the chair and selecting a rotation speed, number of turns for which the chair is to be rotated, etc.) and the optokinetic device
(commanding lowering of the optokinetic device into position and designating the speed of rotation of the stripe cage of the optokinetic device, etc.). Similarly, the test administrator can operate the CEOG system of the present invention so as to administer, in an automated manner, the saccadic test or the tracking test (in terms of actuating a flasher device or a light scanner, respectively, and designating the scanning speed, scanning pattern, etc.). Moreover, in the CEOG system of the present invention, electrode test data derived from electrodes attached to the head of the patient are, after amplification and digitization, stored in the system processor, the system having the capability of immediate display of the raw data via any one of various conventional display devices (graphic display terminal, hard-copy printer, etc.). However, the CEOG system of the present invention is unique in that the adverse effects of the typically encountered offset voltage characterizing such electrode test data (which are initially in the form of input voltage signals) can be compensated for by not only manual techniques, but also automated techniques. Specifically, the CEOG system of the present invention affords the test administrator with an immediate display of the analog test data signals after preamplification, but before amplification, and further provides the test administrator with means for manually adjusting ampli fier network reference voltages so as to eliminate the "offset voltage" effect by zero-adjusting the amplifiers to achieve zero-volt readings for non-variation of the patient's eyes from a center position. In addition, the CEOG system of the present invention provides the test administrator with the selectable option of automatic zero-adjustment by means of the system processor.
Finally, the CEOG system of the present invention -- by means of the system processor -- provides immediate, on-line processing of the input test data so as to permit immediate processing and editing of the input test data to delete artificats typically caused by electronic noise, eye blinks of the patient, random eye movements of the patient, poor electrode contact, etc. In this manner, the inventive CEOG system is able to detect minute voltage changes (of the order, typically, of several microvolts per degree of eye displacement), to amplify them many thousands of times without distortion, and both to record the processed data in memory (for future use) and to display the processed data on a "real time" basis. The inventive CEOG system is, moreover, able to accomplish the above without accepting extraneous signals from the "outside world," and without generating any extraneous signals internally.
Thus, the inventive CEOG system is able to provide rapid and accurate analysis of data so as to afford the physician with critical information in acceptable format and in a very short period of time. Such provided data typically includes: amplitude, frequency and duration of fast and slow components of nystagmus; maximum, minimum and mean velocity and amplitude of saccades (sychronized jumps made by the eye in moving from one visual target to another in a short period of time); comparison of saccadic amplitude with light jump amplitude; and measurements of the delay between light jump and eye jump. The latter data results from statistical analyses performed by the inventive CEOG system, followed by graphic display of the information resulting therefrom.
Therefore, it is an object of the present invention to provide a computerized electro-oculographic (CEOG) system and, in particular, an integrated system for automated administration of various EOG and VER tests to a patient, followed by automated processing of the resultant test data so as to provide critical information to the attending physician in acceptable format and in a very short period of time.
It is an additional object of the present invention to provide an integrated system for performing quickly and efficiently, and in an automated manner, various EOG or VER tests selected by the test administrator, utilizing the various test stimuli equipment included in the system.
It is an additional object of the present invention to provide an integrated system which is responsive to operator selection of desired stimuli to be administered to a patient, as well as to operator specification of various test stimuli characteristics, for automatically administering, to the patient, the test stimuli having the desired characteristics. It is an additional object of the present invention to provide an integrated system for automated administration of test stimuli to a patient, wherein operator selection of the various test stimuli and characteristic thereof is facilitated by utilization of a single operator control section, or console.
It is an additional object of the present invention to provide a system for automated administration of test stimuli, wherein electrode test data is immediately recorded on-line, and is available for immediate display of such "raw data" to the test administrator.
It is a further object of the present invention to provide an integrated test system wherein electrode test data is immediately and automatically analyzed to provide critical information, needed by a physician, in acceptable format and in a very short period of time. It is a further object of the present invention to provide an integrated CEOG system wherein the adverse effects of the "offset voltage" phenomenon -- typically encountered in the derivation of test data from electrodes connected to a patient -- are negated by provision of both manual and automated zero-adjusting capabilities.
With the above and other objects in view that will hereinafter appear, the nature of the invention will be more clearly understood by reference to the following description, the appended claims, and the accompanying drawings.
Brief Description of Drawings
Figure 1 is a diagram representing a broad overview of the CEOG system of the present invention. Figure 2 is a more detailed block diagram of the CEOG system of the invention.
Figure 3A is a diagrammatic representation of the preamplifier network 24 of the CEOG system of Figure 2.
Figure 3B is a detailed schematic of the preamplifiers A1, A2,..., A6 of the preamplifier network 24 of Figure 3A.
Figure 4A is a diagrammatic representation of the amplifier network 26 of the CEOG system of Figure 2. Figure 4B is a detailed schematic of the amplifiers A11, A12,..., A16 of the amplifier network 26 of Figure 4A.
Figure 5 is a diagrammatic representation of biasing circuitry 46' contained in the amplifier network 26 of the CEOG system of Figure 2. Figure 6A is a diagrammatic representation of the ADC portion 56' of the converter stage 56 of the CEOG system of Figure 2.
Figure 6B is a detailed schematic of one-half of the converter A/D1 of Figure 6A. Figure 6C is a diagrammatic representation of address decoding logic 190 in converter stage 56 of the CEOG system of Figure 2.
Figure 6D is a detailed schematic diagram of further ADC logic circuitry 200 and 250 of the converter stage 56 of the CEOG system of Figure 2.
Figure 6E is a detailed schematic diagram of the DAC portion 300 of the converter stage 56 of the CEOG system of Figure 2. Figure 7A is a diagrammatic representation of the motor controller 52 of the CEOG system of Figure 2.
Figure 7B is a detailed schematic diagram of the fail-safe circuit 326 of Figure 7A. Figure 7C is a detailed schematic of the chair interlock circuitry 328 of Figure 7A.
Figure 7D is a detailed schematic diagram of the dynamic braking relay 322 of Figure 7A.
Figure 8 is a diagrammatic representation of the relay panel 20 of the CEOG system of Figure 2.
Figure 9A is a diagrammatic representation of the operator control section 450 of the control panel 54 of the CEOG system of Figure 2.
Figures 9B through 9E are detailed schematic diagrams of the control panel 54 of the CEOG system of Figure 2.
Figures 10A through 100 are detailed logic block diagrams and circuit schematics of the logic section 62 of the CEOG system of Figure 2. Figures 11A through 11D and 11G are detailed logic block diagrams and circuit schematics of the interface 30 of the CEOG system of Figure 2.
Figures 11E, 11F and 11H are timing diagrams relating to write (data out), read (data in) and interrupt operations, respectively, as carried out in the interface 30 of the CEOG system of Figure 2.
Figures 12A and 12B are general flowcharts of the test program and analysis program, repectively, implemented by the processor 34 of the CEOG system of Figure 2. Best Mode for Carrying out the Invention
Figure 1 is a diagram representing a broad overview of the CEOG system of the present invention. The CEOG system of the present invention is for use in performing electro-oculographic (EOG) tests and visual evoked response (VER) tests on a subject 2, the subject being positioned within a patient system or test station 4. Typically, an electrode junction box 6 is placed on or near the head of the subject 2, and electrodes 6a through 6i connected to junction box 6 are attached to the skin on the head of the subject 2, so as to permit EOG testing; for VER testing, two pairs of electrodes are connected to the right occipital/right ear lobe, respectively, of the head of the patient, while a fifth electrode 6i is connected to the patient's forehead, as a ground (or reference) electrode.
The test station 4, in which the subject is positioned, comprises a rotating chair 8 for rotating the subject 2 (if appropriate for the particular test being administered), the rotation of the chair being controlled by control unit 10. The test station 4 also comprises: a light spot source 12 for generating a light spot; a set of x-y scanning mirrors 14 for receiving and reflecting the light spot so as to cause the light spot to appear on the generally cylindrical walls 18 of the test station 4, the x-y scanning of the mirrors 14 being controllable so as to cause the light spot to move in the x and/or y directions in accordance with a controlled pattern called for by the paticular test; and an optokinetic device or system (a vertical stripe projector) 16 for causing vertical stripe patterns to be projected onto, and to appear on, the cylindrical walls 18 (also as appropriate for the particular test being administered). The light spot source 12, x-y scanning mirrors 14 and optokinetic device 16 are controlled by a relay panel 20, which is itself controlled by control unit 10. In the particular arrangement shown in Figure 1, electrodes 6a, 6b and 6e, 6f are connected to detect horizontal eye movement of the right and left eyes, respectively, of the subject 2. Similarly, electrodes 6c, 6d and 6g, 6h are connected to measure vertical eye movement of the right and left eyes, respectively, of the subject 2. Finally, a reference electrode 6i is connected in the area of the temple of the subject 2. It is to be understood that other arrangements of the electrodes 6a through 6i can be used, as called for by the particular test being administered. In fact, whereas electrodes 6a through 6i are connected in an arrangement typically utilized in the administration of EOG tests, it is to be understood that further electrodes (not shown) can be connected to the subject 2 in an "occipital lobe" arrangement for the administration of VER tests.
Electrodes 6a through 6i are connected to preamplifier network 24, the output of the preamplifier network 24 being provided to filters/amplifiers 26. Filters/amplifiers 26 provide analog outputs on respective channels corresponding to respective electrode measurements, and designated as RH (right horizontal), RV (Right vertical), LH (left horizontal), LV (left vertical), RO (right occipital), and LO (left occipital)! The analog outputs from the filters/amplifiers 26 are provided to digitizer 28, which converts the analog signals to corresponding digital signals. The digital signals from digitizer 28 are provided, via computer interface circuit 30, to a computer, generally designated by reference numeral 32.
In the preferred embodiment, computer 32 comprises a processor 34, responsive to computer programs 36, for processing the digital input test data (that is, the digital outputs of digitizer 28, provided via computer interface 30), and for providing visual display of the test data on display device 38, hard copy recording of test results on hard copy printing device 40, and permanently recorded test data via a peripheral unit such as floppy disk 42. Computer 32 also comprises a keyboard 44 by which operator control of test administration, processing of test results, and output of test results can be achieved.
The CEOG of the present invention also comprises auto-calibration (or biasing) circuitry 46 connected to processor 34, by means of which automatic (processor-controlled) biasing of preamplifier network 24 can be achieved. This is in addition to manual biasing of preamplifier network 24. As will be discussed below in more detail, preamplifier network 24 is manually adjusted, and preferably automatically adjusted as well, for proper preamplifier biasing, so as to compensate for the offset voltages of the electrodes 6a through 6i, thereby maintaining zero adjustment of each electrode when the subject's eyes are directed toward a center position.
It will also be noted that, in a manner to be described below in more detail, processor 34 controls chair rotation via computer interface 30 and control unit 10, and controls the administration of test stimuli to the subject 2 via control unit 10 and relay panel 20. Referring to the electrode junction box 6, it is to be noted that, in the preferred embodiment, preamplifier network 24 is physically located in the electrode junction box 6. Figure 2 is a more detailed block diagram of the CEOG system of the invention. Reference numerals previously employed in Figure 1 to designate various elements of the CEOG system have been maintained in Figure 2, where appropriate. The CEOG system of the present invention generally comprises, with reference to Figure 2, a patient system or test station 4 including a revolving chair 8, upon which the subject 2 is seated -- typically during VER and EOG testing. The chair 8 is rotated by a motor 50, driven by a motor controller 52 connected to a power source (such as 110 volts, 60 Hz.). The motor controller 52 is, in turn, controlled by input control signals received from control panel 54 in control unit 10. In addition, various output status signals (to be discussed below) from motor 50
(pertaining, for example, to chair position and speed) are provided, via motor controller 52, to control panel 54 for distribution to other portions of the CEOG system (as will be discussed below). Electrode test data derived from electrodes 6a-6i (Figure 1) attached to the subject 2 (Figure 2) are provided, via preamplifier network 24 and amplifier network 26, to analog-to-digital converters (ADC) contained in converter stage 56. Digital representations of the electrode test data are derived therein, and are provided as an input DATA to processor 34 via EOG interface 30.
In the preferred embodiment, it is highly useful to provide a signal monitor scope 58 for displaying, to the operator, the electrode test data signals as generated by preamplifier network 24. For example, by viewing the displayed electrode test data on scope 58, the operator of the CEOG system is able to perform manual bias adjustment of preamplifier network 24, by which broad-range biasing of preamplifier network 24 (to compensate for the voltage offset of the electrodes) can be accomplished easily and quickly. Moreover, as can be seen in Figure 2, a preferred embodiment of the CEOG system includes a selector switch 59, by which the operator can select test data signals from a particular pair of electrodes for display on the scope, thus achieving individual bias adjustment of each respective preamplifier (corresponding to a selected pair of electrodes). Moreover, processor 34 -- as a result of processing the received digital test data, DATA -- provides an output BIAS (via interface 30, converter stage 56, and amplifier network 26) to preamplifier network 24. In response to the input BIAS, preamplifier network 24 is automatically biased so as to provide continuous/automatic compensation for the offset voltage of the electrodes.
Control panel 54 serves as a power distribution/junction box for distributing power throughout the system. Specifically, control panel 54 is powered by a 110 volts, 60 Hz. power input, and provides this A.C. power to power supply 60 which, in response thereto, provides necessary D.C. voltages (+5 v., +12 v., +15 v., -15 v., etc.) to the various elements of the system, as needed. Control panel 54 also receives the various D.C. power inputs from power supply 60, and distributes such D.C. power inputs throughout the system. Thus, as illustrated in Figure 2, power outputs PWR are provided by control panel 54 to preamplifier network 24, amplifier network 26, converter stage 56 and logic section 62, among others. Control panel 54 also serves the function of distributing various logic control signals throughout the system. As previously mentioned, motor controller 52 -- which controls rotation of the chair -- receives control signals from control panel 54, such control signals originating in logic section 62 and processor 34. More specifically, control panel 54 provides control signals which, as will be seen below, command the motor controller 52 to control the motor 50 in such a manner that the chair 8 will commence revolution on command, will revolve at a given (commanded) speed S, will stop after one turn, after a series of turns, or on command, and will automatically restart revolution in the opposite direction.
Control panel 54 also receives and distributes various status signals, such as a chair position indication signal and chair turn information provided by chair 8 via motor 50 motor controller 52. Such status signals are provided to logic section 62 and interface 30. For example, motor 50 and motor controller 52 transmit, to control panel 54, status signals defining tachometer information (relating to the actual speed of the rotating chair 8) , position information relating to the position of the chair 8 relative to a starting position, and turn information relating to the detection of completion of each chair rotation, as detected by a positon detector circuit (not shown in Figure 2 but to be discussed further below).
Control panel 54 also operates, in a manner to be described in more detail below, with relay panel 20 so as to control test stimuli, and thus the administration of tests to the subject 2, via control of light spot source 12 and x-y scanning mirrors 14, optokinetic device 16 (stripe cage 76), and flasher 70.
More specifically, relay panel 20 controls the usage of a light spot source 12 (such as a laser) which operates in conjunction with a shutter 66 and x-y scanning mirrors 14 to provide test stimuli comprising a light spot which moves in accordance with a pre-programmed pattern corresponding to desired test stimuli for the particular test being administered (e.g., EOG tracking). Light spot source (or laser) 12 is preferably a Metrologic Laser, Model No. ML-600 or ML-620 (manufactured by Metrologic Instrument, Inc.). The shutter 66 -- which is a mechanism used to block the laser beam (rather than turning on and turning off the laser beam, which could be detrimental to the laser) -- is preferably implemented by a solenoid (Model No. T6x12-C-12v D.C. (manufactured by Guardian, and obtainable from Pfizer Medical Systems of Columbia, Maryland)). The solenoid in shutter 66 merely moves a small piece of metal to selectively block and not block the laser beam. Finally, the x-y scanning mirrors 14 are preferably implemented by the following equipment (manufactured by General Scanning, Inc. of Watertown, Massachusetts): a Series XY-300 Scanning Assembly, two G-330 Galvanometers, an X-7 Mount, and an A-102 Driver Amplifier. Moreover, relay panel 20 controls a motor 68 which is used to raise and lower a flasher 70, thus placing flasher 70 in position with respect to the subject 2 for the purpose of administering a "flashing light" (VER) test. The flasher 70 is controlled by photostimulator 72 which, in turn, is controlled by the processor 34 via logic section 62 and interface 30. The flasher 70 is preferably implemented by a Photostimulator device, Model PS22 (manufactured by Grass Medical Instruments of Quincy, Massachusetts). Finally, the relay panel 20 controls the optokinetic device 16, consisting of a motor 74 which is used to raise and lower a stripe cage 76, such optokinetic device 16 being utilized (for example) in the administration of EOG tests to the subject 2.
Figure 3A is a diagrammatic representation of the preamplifier network 24 of the CEOG system.
Referring to Figures 1, 2 and 3A, the preamplifier network 24 -- as previously mentioned -- is preferably located in the electrode junction box 6 (Figure 1). Each of the electrodes 6a through 6i is connected to the preamplifier network 24.
More specifically, preamplifier network 24 of Figures 1 and 2 basically comprises, with reference to Figure 3A, amplifiers A1 through A6, each corresponding to a specific pair of electrodes 6a/6b, 6c/6d, ... connected to the subject 2. Preamplifier network 24 comprises individual preamplifiers A1, A2,..., A6 for receiving input test data signals from corresponding pairs of electrodes, and for providing corresponding preamplifier outputs PREMP1, PREMP2,..., PREMP6 to the amplifier network 26 (Figure 2). Preamplifiers A1, A2,..., A6 also receive zero-adjustment inputs ZRADJ1, ZRADJ2,..., ZRADJ6, resulting from manual bias adjustment by the operator or automatic bias adjustment under the control of the processor 34 (Figure 2), as will be discussed below relative to Figure 5. Thus, electrode test data signals for a particular eye measurement (for example, left vertical eye measurement) are received and provided to the L and 10 terminals of one of the preamplifiers (for example, preamplifier A1). After amplification in preamplifier A1, a preamplifier output is provided (specifically, the preamplifier output of preamplifier A1 is provided as signal PREMP1 via terminal A thereof). Zero adjustment signals (such as ZRADJ1 corresponding to bias adjustment of preamplifier A1) are received and provided to terminal 2 of the particular preamplifier to be adjusted (in this case, preamplifier A1). ZRADJ1, ZRADJ2,... are zero adjustment signals (previously referred to, in Figure 2, as BIAS signals) received either from amplifier network 26 (in the case of manual bias adjustment) or from processor 34 via the DAC contained in converter stage 56 and the interface 30 (in the case of automatic bias adjustment). This subject will be addressed in further detail below.
Power signals (previously referred to as PWR in Figure 2) -- specifically, +15 volts D.C, -15 volts D.C, and a ground signal GND -- are provided to terminals F, E and H, respectively, of the various preamplifiers A1 through A6 as power inputs thereto, terminal K of each preamplifier A1 through A6 being grounded.
Finally, the preferred embodiment includes input/output connector terminals 102 connected by coaxial cable to respective preamplifiers A1-A6, as shown in Figure 3A for preamplifier A1 alone. Thus, terminal B of each preamplifier A1-A6 is preferably connected in common to the outer shield of the coaxial cable. This common ground connection arrangement significantly aids common mode rejection, thus eliminating a substantial amount of normally encountered system noise. Figure 3B is a detailed schematic of the preamplifiers A1, A2,..., A6 of the preamplifier network 24 of Figure 3A.
Basically, preamplifiers A1, A2,..., A6 each comprise an amplifier AMP1, which -- in the preferred embodiment -- is an AD522 amplifier (manufactured by Analog Devices of Massachusetts). Amplifier AMPl receives electrode test data signals via terminals L and 10. Such electrode test data signals are applied to terminals 1 and 3, respectively, of amplifier AMPl. Diodes CR1 and CR2 provide amplifier AMP1 with protection from "static discharge."
Capacitors C7 and C8 are provided between terminal L and ground, and terminal 10 and ground, respectively, for the purpose of removing high frequencies occurring in the electrode test data signals. Grounding resistors R13 and R14 -- provided between terminals L and 10, respectively, and ground -- are preferably five megohm resistors which drain off leakage currents from amplifier AMP1 before the electrodes are "plugged in." If this is not done, a voltage (as much as ±15 volts) could accumulate on capacitors C7 and C8, which would cause the patient to receive a shock through the electrodes. Amplifier AMP1 also has an external gain-setting resistor R8 connected between terminals 2 and 14 thereof.
Variable resistance P1 is an offset null potential which is adjusted to provide zero volts at terminal 7 of amplifier AMP1 when the inputs (at terminals 1 and 3 thereof) are "shorted." A further supply voltage -VEE is provided to amplifier AMP1 (at terminal 5 thereof). Amplifier AMP1 provides its output PREMPi (i = 1, 2,..., 6) to the amplifier network 26 (Figure 2 ) . As mentioned previously with reference to Figure 3A, each amplifier A1, A2,..., A6 of preamplifier network 24 may be zero-adjusted by means of respective inputs ZRADJ1, ZRADJ2, — , ZRADJ6. With reference to Figure 3B, such signals ZRADJi (i = 1, 2, — ) are generated by manual zero-adjustment performed by the operator, and are also automatically generated by processor 34 (via interface 30 and converter stage 56 of Figure 2) .
Such signals ZRADJi (i = 1, 2,...) are applied as inputs (at terminals 2 and 3) to amplifier AMP2, which acts as a current-to-voltage converting amplifier for converting the zero adjustment input current ZARDJi (i = 1, 2,...) to an output voltage VREF. Input ZRADJi is derived from circuitry 46' of Figure 5 (to be discussed below). An input capacitor C9 is provided for the purpose of removing noise from the input signal ZRADJi. Amplifier AMP2 is provided with a feedback RC network, consisting of capacitor C10 (which also removes noise) and resistor R11 connected in parallel between output terminal 6 and input terminal 2 of amplifier AMP2. Supply voltages +VCC and -VEE are supplied to terminals 7 and 4, respectively, of amplifier AMP2, and biasing capacitors C11 and C12 are connected between respective terminals 7 and 4 (of amplifier AMP2) and ground.
Amplifier AMP2 -- connected as shown and discussed above -- converts the zero-adjustment current ZRADJi (i = 1, 2,...) to a voltage output VREF applied to amplifier AMP1 (terminal 11 thereof) for the purpose of bias adjustment.
Supply voltages +VCC and -VEE are provided to amplifier AMP2 by respective circuits 100 and 102 (Figure 3B). Circuits 100 and 102 consist of RC networks (resistor R1 and capacitors C1 and C3 in the case of circuit 100, and resistor R2 and capacitors C2 and C4 in the case of circuit 102). The latter RC circuits operate on -15 volt and +15 volt inputs, respectively, to derive the supply voltages -VEE and +VCC, respectively, while at the same time accomplishing noise decoupling.
Figure 4A is a diagrammatic representation of the amplifier network 26 of the CEOG system. Amplifier network 26 comprises a plurality of amplifiers A11, A12,..., A16 for receiving respective preamplifier output signals PREMP1, PREMP2,..., PREMP6, as shown. Amplifiers A11,..., A16 amplify the aforementioned respective preamplifier output signals, and provide amplifier output signals AMPOUT1,
AMPOUT2,... , AMPOUT6 corresponding to the electrode test data signals for left vertical eye movement, right vertical eye movement, left horizontal eye movement, right horizontal eye movement, left occipital movement and right occipital movement, respectively. The outputs AMPOUT1,..., AMPOUT6 are provided to converter stage 56 (Figure 2).
The inputs PREMP1, PREMP2,..., PREMP6 are also provided to selector switch 59 which, as shown in Figure 4A, selects (by operator actuation of the switch) a particular preamplifier output for display on the scope 58. This facilitates broad-range bias adjustment of the preamplifier output signals by affording the operator a visual display of the preamplifier outputs, and thus immediate visual display of the results of the bias adjustment action taken by the operator. Whereas any conventional oscilloscope can be used to implement signal monitor scope 58, scope 58 is preferably a B&K PRECISION Oscilloscope, Model No. 1403A (manufactured by DYNASCAN Corporation of Chicago, Illinois).
Figure 4B is a detailed schematic of the amplifiers A11, A12,..., A16 of the amplifier network 26 of Figure 4A.
Basically, amplifiers A1j (j = 1,2,...) each comprise an amplifier AMP3 which, in the preferred embodiment, is an AD522 amplifier (manufactured by Analog Devices of Massachusetts). It will be noted that the basic amplifier AMP3 constituting the amplifiers A1j in amplifier network 26 (Figure 4A) is the same as amplifier AMP1 (and AMP2) utilized to constitute the preamplifiers Ai (i = 1,2,...) of preamplifier network 24. However, the external connections of amplifier AMP3 (Figure 4B) differ from those of amplifiers AMP1 and AMP2 (Figure 3B).
Preamplifier output signals PREMPj (j = 1,2,...) are provided via an input network 120 to terminals 1 and 3, respectively, of amplifier AMP3 (Figure 4B). Specifically, network 120 comprises a series of RC circuits made up of resistor R3 in series with capacitor C5, and resistor R5 in series with capacitor C6, such RC networks being provided for the purpose of filtering the inputs PREMPj . Diodes CR1 and CR2 in input network 120 correspond in function to the similarly designated diodes of the preamplifiers Ai (Figure 3B). Capacitors C7 and C8 correspond to the similarly designated capacitors in Figure 3B, and provide the function of high frequency removal during test administration. Resistors R13 and R14 correspond to similarly designated grounding resistors in Figure 3B.
In the preferred embodiment, differently configured amplifiers can be provided for VER and EOG testing, respectively. For example, where AC coupling is desired, resistors R3 and R4 can be replaced by capacitors.
Amplifier AMP3 receives input PREMPj (j = 1,2,...), and amplifies same by a gain factor established by gain-setting resistor R8 (connected at terminals 2 and 14 of amplifier AMP3 ) . As was the case with amplifier AMP1 of Figure 3B, supply voltages +VCC and -VEE are provided at terminals 8 and 5, respectively, of amplifier AMP3. External adjustment of amplifier AMP3 is provided via variable resistor
P1. Amplifier Alj (j = 1,2,...) -- specifically, AMP3 thereof -- provides the amplifier output AMPOUTj (j = 1,2,...) at terminal A, such output AMPj being provided to converter stage 56 (Figure 2).
Figure 5 is a diagrammatic representation of biasing circuitry 46' contained in the amplifier network 26 of Figure 2.
It is to be noted that, whereas Figure 1 discloses auto-calibration circuitry 46, responsive to the processor 34, for adjusting offsets of individual amplifiers within the preamplifier network 24, in the preferred embodiment of the invention, such auto-calibration functions originate in biasing circuitry in amplifier network 26 (Figure 2).
Referring to Figure 5, biasing circuitry 46' basically comprises a plurality of potentiometers POT1,..., POT6 for manual adjustment of the bias of individual amplifiers in preamplifier network 24 (Figure 2), via generation of outputs ZRADJ1,..., ZRADJ6. Such manual adjustment of individual amplifiers A1,..., A6 of preamplifier network 24 (Figure 3A) occurs, in the preferred embodiment, when a bias select switch -- comprising ganged switches S1,..., S6 -- is in either the AUTO or MANUAL positions. When the bias select switch S1,..., S6 is in either position, operator adjustment of POT1-POT6 serves to vary the resistance thereof, which results in variation of the current through resistors R31-R36, thus varying the zero-adjustment current signals ZRADJ1-ZRADJ6.
Automatic adjustment of individual amplifiers in preamplifier network 24 (Figure 2) is achieved when ganged switch S1,..., S6 (Figure 5) is in the AUTO position. When in the AUTO position, automatic adjustment input signals BIAS1-BIAS6 are received from converter stage 56 (Figure 2), and such signals BIAS1-BIAS6 contribute, via respective resistors R21-R26, to the generation of zero-adjustment currents ZRADJ1-ZRADJ6.
It is to be noted that, when the bias select switch is in the AUTO position, both automatic and manual adjustment of individual amplifiers in preamplifier network 24 (Figure 2) can occur, in view of the fact that resistors R21-R26 (relating to automatic adjustment) and resistors R31-R36 (relating to manual adjustment) are connected in parallel under those circumstances. However, when the switch is in the MANUAL position, only manual adjustment of individual amplifiers in preamplifier network 24 (Figure 2) can occur, in view of the fact that only resistors R31-R36 (relating to manual adjustment) are connected in series with the corresponding potentiometers (POT1-POT6), resistors R21-R26 being maintained in an "open circuit" condition under those circumstances.
By virtue of the above arrangement, the operator of the inventive CEOG system is able to manually adjust the offset voltage of the individual amplifiers in preamplifier network 24 (Figure 2) via adjustment of particular potentiometers (POT1, POT2, etc.). This enables the operator of the CEOG system to perform broad-range biasing of particular amplifiers -- e.g., amplifiers associated with left vertical eye movement, right vertical eye movement, etc. -- and thus, to achieve, via such broad-range biasing, elimination of almost all of the D.C. offset voltage associated with the corresponding electrodes attached to the head of the subject. Whereas such manual adjustment can be accomplished as a result of an original or periodic "lineup" of the system, the CEOG system of the present invention also provides automatic, narrow-range biasing of the individual amplifiers in preamplifier network 24 (Figure 2). Such automatic, narrow-range biasing of the individual amplifiers in the network 24 is achieved by generation, in processor 34 (Figure 2) of BIAS signals, such BIAS signals being provided -- via interface 30 and converter stage 56 -- to the biasing circuitry 46' (Figure 5). Such BIAS inputs (BIAS1, BIAS2, ...) contribute to output adjustment signals ZRADJ1, ZRADJ2, etc., and elimination of the remainder of the D.C. offset voltage associated with the corresponding electrodes is thus automatically achieved.
Figure 6A is a diagrammatic representation of the ADC portion 56' of the converter stage 56 of Figure 2. The ADC portion 56' of converter stage 56 (Figure 2) includes a plurality of ADC's -- designated A/D1, A/D2 and A/D3 -- for receiving pairs of analog electrode test data input signals AMPOUT1/AMPOUT2, AMPOUT3/AMPOUT4 and AMPOUT5/AMPOUT6, respectively, from amplifiers A11, A12,..., A16, respectively, of amplifier network 26 (Figure 4A), and for converting these analog inputs to respective digital outputs DAT0-DAT9. More specifically, converters A/D1-A/D5 are clocked by a timing clock input SAMPLE, and this causes each converter to convert its respective analog input signal (AMPOUT1, AMPOUT2, etc.) to a 10-bit digital word which is stored in an internal buffer in the particular converter A/D1-A/D5. Then, upon generation of inputs
Figure imgf000035_0002
,
Figure imgf000035_0003
and
Figure imgf000035_0001
by the computer processor 34 (Figure 2), converters A/D1-A/D5 gate the data from the internal buffer onto the output channel, at the appropriate time, constituting the digital output DAT0-DAT9. Futhermore, the ADC portion 56' includes a further converter A/134 for receiving and converting, to digital form, analog signals TACH2 (relating to the speed of motor 50 (Figure 2) which drives the chair 8, and STRIPESPD (relating to the speed of the motor 74 which drives the stripe cage 76 in optokinetic device 16 (Figure 2)). Finally, the ADC portion 56' of Figure 6A includes an additional converter A/D5 for receiving and converting, to digital form, analog signals POSX and POSY (relating to the X and Y positions of the mirrors 14 (Figure 2)). Analog signal TACH2 is provided to converter stage 56 by motor controller 52, via control panel 54 and logic section 62 (Figure 2); analog signal STRIPESPD is provided by control panel 54 directly to converter stage 56; and analog signals POSX and POSY are provided by relay panel 20 to converter stage 56 via control panel 54 and logic section 62 (Figure 2).
Finally, as will be seen below, each converter A/D1-A/D5 receives an input SAMPLE which causes the commencement of the conversion of analog data to digital form. When all conversions are complete, output DATRDY is generated as an output. These two control signals will be discussed further below. Figure 6B is a detailed schematic of one half of the converter A/D1 of Figure 6A. It is to be understood that the other half of converter A/D1 is identical in structure to the first half shown in Figure 6B. Moreover, it is to be further understood that each converter A/D2-A/D5 is identically configured to converter A/D1.
Converter A/D1 -- that is, each half thereof -- basically comprises sample and hold circuit 150, ADC device 154, and buffers 158 and 160. Sample and hold circuit 150 comprises amplifiers 166 and 168, and AND gate 170, configured as shown. Sample and hold circuit 150 is preferably an AD582 device (manufactured by Analog Devices). Moreover, ADC device 154 is a conventional analog-to-digital converting device, but is preferably an AD571 device (manufactured by Analog Devices).
Finally, buffers 158 and 160 include tristate amplifiers 172 through 177 and AND gate 178, configured as shown. That is to say, when the output of gate 178 is "low," the outputs of amplifiers 172 through 177 are open circuits; when the output of gate 178 is "high," the outputs of amplifiers 172, 173,... are the same as input signals B1, B2,... from ADC154. Preferably, buffers 158 and 160 are hex/tristate buffers, Model Nos. SN74LS365 or SN74365 (manufactured by Texas Instruments).
In operation, output AMPOUT1 is received from amplifier network 26 (Figure 2) by sample and hold circuit 150. Signal DATRDY is normally "high," and signal SAMPLE is normally "low." When SAMPLE goes
"high," signal
Figure imgf000037_0002
also goes "high, " and gate G1 in sample and hold 150 closes, so that the voltage at AMPOUT1 appears at the input to amplifier 168. Single AMPOUT1 then appears at the output of amplifier 168, and thus on both sides of capacitor C1. When SAMPLE goes "low," gate G1 opens (and stays open until both
SAMPLE and
Figure imgf000037_0001
are both "high"), leaving the AMPOUT1 voltage at the output of amplifier 168 even though AMPOUT1 may change during the analog-to-digital conversion in ADC154. Thus, when gate G1 is closed, the signal AMPOUT1 is sampled (acquired), and when gate G1 opens, the sampled (acquired) input signal is held at the AIN terminal of ADC154.
ADC device 154 performs digital conversion of the analog input AMPOUT1 in response to receipt of signal SAMPLE from ADC logic circuitry 200 going "low" (Figure 6D), to be discussed below. During the digital conversion process, ADC holds output
Figure imgf000037_0005
to the "high" condition, thus making DATRDY "low." Once conversion is completed, however, ADC device 154 generates a "low" output
Figure imgf000037_0003
. It is to be noted that, in order for output DATRDY to go "high," each of the two ADC devices 154 in each converter A/D1,...,
A/D6 must generate a "low" output at terminal
Figure imgf000037_0004
. This will allow the output DATRDY (subsequently provided to ADC logic circuitry 200 (Figure 6D)) to go "high." Digital bit outputs B1 through B6 are provided to respective tristate buffers 172 through 177 in hex buffer 158, while digital bit outputs B7 through B10 are provided to corresponding buffers (not shown) in buffer 160. In addition, buffers 172 through 177 of buffer 158 (and corresponding buffers (not shown) in buffer 160) are of the type that look like an open circuit at the output until receipt of a clock-type signal. Specifically, as will be seen below, processor 34 (Figure 2) provides address input signals to ADC address decoding logic 190 (Figure 6C), which generates clock-type signals
Figure imgf000038_0001
,
Figure imgf000038_0002
(as will be explained in detail below). Thus,
Figure imgf000038_0003
is provided to buffers 158 and 160, which transmit the buffered digital bit data, via interface 30, to processor 34 (Figure 2), as outputs DAT0 through DAT9. Finally, it should be noted again that Figure 6B is a detailed schematic of one half of converter A/D1 of Figure 6A, and further, that each of converters A/D2-A/D5 are configured identically to converter
A/D1. As should be clear from the above explanation, the first halves of A/D1-A/D5 release their digital output DAT0-DAT9 in response to respective clock-type inputs
Figure imgf000038_0004
(see Figure 6A), while the second halves of converters A/D1-A/D5 release digital data DAT0-DAT9 in response to respective clock-type inputs
Figure imgf000038_0005
Figure imgf000038_0006
Figure 6C is a diagrammatic representation of address decoding logic 190 in converter stage 56 of Figure 2.
Specifically, logic 190 basically comprises binary/octal decoder circuits 192, 194 and 196. Principal inputs to the logic 190 are address inputs ADDR1, ADDR2 and ADDR3 , and further inputs
Figure imgf000039_0009
Figure imgf000039_0001
and
Figure imgf000039_0002
Binary/octal decoder 192 responds to receipt of signal inputs
Figure imgf000039_0003
(acting as a decoding clock signal) and inputs ADDR1-ADDR3 to perform octal conversion, selectively actuating one of the eight outputs
Figure imgf000039_0004
through
Figure imgf000039_0005
in correspondence to the particular decoder input. In this manner, previously discussed clock-type outputs, STROB10-STROB17, are obtained. STROB10-STROB17 are, it will be recalled, clock-type signals provided to respective converter devices A/D1, A/D2, in the ADC portion 56' of converter stage 56 (see Figure 6A) .
Similarly, binary/octal decoder 194 responds to receipt of signal inputs
Figure imgf000039_0006
and ADDR1-ADDR3 to perform octal conversion, thus actuating a selected one of the outputs
Figure imgf000039_0007
through
Figure imgf000039_0008
in correspondence to the particular decoder inputs. Thus, clock-type outputs STROB20-STROB27 are obtained, and these clock-type outputs (as will be discussed subsequently) are utilized in the DAC portion of the converter stage 56 (Figure 2).
Finally, binary/octal decoder 196 responds to receipt of signal inputs
Figure imgf000039_0010
and ADDR1-ADDR3 to perform octal conversion, thus actuating a selected one of the outputs Q0 through Q7 in correspondence to the particular decoder inputs. Thus, clock-type outputs STROBMX and STROBMY are obtained, and these clock-type outputs (as will be discussed below) are utilized as clock-type inputs to the DAC circuitry 300 (Figure 6E). Moreover, decoder 196 (Figure 6C) generates clock-type outputs
Figure imgf000039_0011
and
Figure imgf000039_0012
which are clock-type inputs provided to A/D5 (Figure 6A). Although any binary/octal converter circuitry may be utilized to implement binary/octal decoders 192, 194 and 196 of Figure 6C, binary/octal decoders 192, 194 and 196 are preferably SN74LS42 converter circuits (manufactured by Texas Instruments).
Figure 6D is a detailed schematic diagram of further ADC logic circuity 200 and 250 of the converter stage 56 of Figure 2.
Logic circuitry 200 consists of a timer 202 (preferably, a one-second timer) which responds to
"turn on" of the system by generating -- via inverter 204 -- an output
Figure imgf000040_0001
utilized to reset the A/D and D/A systems. In particular, output
Figure imgf000040_0002
is utilized to reset certain latch circuits 302-305 contained in the DAC circuitry 300 (Figure 6E) to be discussed below. Logic 250 (Figure 6D) basically comprises NAND gate 252 and one-shot devices 254 and 256. NAND gate 252 detects the occurrence of either input
Figure imgf000040_0004
(a one-bit (specifically, bit number 14) input from interface 30 of Figure 2) or
Figure imgf000040_0003
(an input from logic section 62 of Figure 2 ) , and triggers the one-shot device 254 to provide output SAMPLE, transmitted to the ADC device 154 in each converter A/D1-A/D5 (Figures 6A and 6B). As will be recalled, the trailing edge of signal SAMPLE causes each ADC device 154 to start the conversion process.
As will also be recalled, upon completion of the conversion process in all ADC devices 154, output DATRDY is permitted to go "high." This triggers one-shot device 256 (Figure 6D) which, in turn, results in generation of output
Figure imgf000040_0005
transmitted to the processor 34 vi interface 30 (Figure 2). By means of the output
Figure imgf000040_0006
the processor 34 becomes aware of the fact that digital data -- now converted from analog form -- is ready for transmission to the computer processor 34. Accordingly, processor 34 transmits -- via interface 30 -- appropriate decoder inputs
Figure imgf000041_0003
(or
Figure imgf000041_0004
or
Figure imgf000041_0005
), and ADDR1-ADDR3, as a result of which address decoding logic 190 (Figure 6C) issues appropriate clock-type outputs (any one of
Figure imgf000041_0006
) so as to cause the digital data to be transmitted to the processor 34 by the appropriate converter A/D1,..., A/D5 (Figure 6A) .
Figure 6E is a detailed schematic diagram of the DAC portion 300 of the converter stage 56 of Figure 2.
Basically, the DAC portion 300 comprises latch circuits 302 and 303, DAC device 306, and associated amplifier 308. In operation, latch circuits 302 and 303 are reset by input
Figure imgf000041_0002
applied to the R terminals of each. Then, in response to a clock-type input
Figure imgf000041_0001
applied to the CK terminals thereof, each of latch circuits 302 and 303 receives and latches digital data DTOA6-DTOA9 and DTOA0-DTOA5, respectively, from the processor 34 (Figure 2) applied thereto.
Whereas any conventional latch circuit may be utilized to implement latch circuits 302 and 303 in Figure 6F, latch circuits 302 and 303 are preferably 74LS174 latch devices (manufactured by Texas Instruments).
DAC device 306 operates in conjunction with latch circuits 302 and 303 to receive latch outputs Q1-Q4 from latch circuit 302 and latch outputs Q1-Q6 from latch circuit 303. DAC 306 then performs digital-to-analog conversion to produce the analog output signal ANALOUT, which is provided to amplifier 308. Amplifier 308 performs current-to-voltage conversion of the ANALOUT output of DAC device 306 to produce output voltage signal BIASN (N = 1,2,..., 6), the latter being provided to the biasing circuit 46' of Figure 5 (previously discussed above). Whereas any conventional digital-to-analog converting device may be used to implement DAC device 306, DAC device 306 is preferably an AD561J converter device (manufactured by Analog Devices of Massachusetts). Accordingly, DAC 306 is provided with supply voltages VCC and VEE (+5 and -15 volts, respectively). The gain and bias of the outputs of the DAC device 306 are externally set by potentiometers P1 and P4, respectively.
Finally, whereas any conventional operational amplifier may be utilized to implement amplifier 308 of Figure 6E, amplifier 308 is preferably a UA741 amplifier (manufactured by Analog Devices of Massachusetts). Accordingly, amplifier 308 is supplied with +15 volt and -15 volt supply voltages. Whereas analog output ANALOUT is provided to terminal 2 of amplifier 308, the terminal 3 thereof is connected to ground via grounding resistor R1. Moreover, the output of amplifier 308 -- besides being connected in a "feedback" arrangement to the DAC device 306 (via potentiometer P1) -- is also feedback-connected to its terminal 2 input via feedback capacitor C5. Finally, amplifier 308 is provided with bypass capacitors C6 and C7.
Whereas Figure 6E and the associated description above describe the DAC circuitry 300 as comprising a pair of latch circuits 302 and 303, a single DAC device 306 and a single amplifier 308, the DAC circuitry 300 preferably includes an additional pair of latch circuits, an additional DAC device, and an additional amplifier, so as to provide dual-channel outputs. In such a preferred arrangement, the output BIASN (N = 1, 3, 5) would provide for bias adjustment of the odd-numbered preamplifiers in preamplifier network 24, while the output of the second portion of DAC circuitry 300 -- designated BIASM (M = 2, 4, 6) -- would service the even-numbered preamplifiers in preamplifier network 24.
To summarize, processor 34 (Figure 2) provides digital signals DTOA0-DTOA9 (Figure 6F) -- via latch circuits 302 and 303 -- to DAC device 306, wherein analog conversion takes place. The resulting analog output ANALOUT -- after current-to-voltage conversion in amplifier 308 -- provides an output voltage signal BIASN. As explained above, in the preferred embodiment, output BIASN (N = 1, 3, 5) adjusts the bias of the odd-numbered preamplifiers in preamplifier network 24 (Figure 2), while an additional output signal BIASM (M = 2, 4, 6) adjusts the bias of the even-numbered preamplifiers.
Figure 7A is a diagrammatic representation of the motor controller 52 of the CEOG system.
Motor controller 52 basically comprises a linear servo controller 320, a dynamic breaking relay 322, tach (motor speed) buffer 324, brake command input (fail safe) circuitry 326, and chair interlock circuitry 328.
In operation, linear servo controller 320 receives a control signal MTRSPD, provided by control panel 54 (Figure 2), but originating in logic section 62 as a result of operator selection. Linear servo controller 320 also receives a tachometer input signal TACHIN from tachometer 51 associated with the motor 50 (Figure 2), indicating actual speed of the motor 50. Linear servo controller 320 then performs, in a conventional manner, a comparison operation of actual motor speed (TACHIN) with desired motor speed (MTRSPD), and -- as a result of such comparison -- controller 320 generates appropriate motor-controlling current (LOADLO/LOADHI ) signals. The motor-controlling currents are provided through dynamic braking relay 322 to motor 50 so as to control the speed of operation thereof by increasing or decreasing the speed of the motor 50, and thus the rotational speed of the chair 8 (Figure 2).
The tachometer input signal TACHIN provided to linear servo controller 320 is also provided to tach buffer 324, from which analog signal TACH2 is provided to the ADC portion 56' of converter stage 56 (Figures 2 and 6A) for subsequent digital conversion, and provision to processor 34 via interface 30. In this manner, the processor 34 is kept apprised of the actual speed of the motor-driven chair 8. Tach buffer 324 can be any conventional buffer amplifier, as is well known to one of ordinary skill in the art.
Linear servo controller 320 also receives -- at terminals 4 and 6 thereof -- respective brake command signals BRK6 and BRK8, these brake command signals being provided by fail safe circuitry 326. Linear servo controller 320 responds to the brake command input signals BRK6 and BRK8 in a conventional manner to force the motor-controlling current from controller 320 to zero during the braking operation. In the preferred embodiment, input signals BRK6 and BRK8 are outputs of the fail safe circuit 326, which circuit 326 receives inputs BRK1 and
Figure imgf000044_0001
from control panel 54 (Figure 2). Figure 7B is a detailed schematic diagram of the fail-safe circuit 326 of Figure 7A. Input signal BRK1 is received from logic section 62 (Figure 2) via control panel 54, and is always maintained at a "high" level (for example, +5 volts). Input signal
Figure imgf000045_0001
is normally maintained "high," so that solenoid 362 is non-actuated, and switch 364 is normally closed. This forces controller 320 (Figure 7A) to put out zero amps at the LOADLO/LOADHI outputs thereof. However, when
Figure imgf000045_0002
goes "low," solenoid 362 is actuated, causing normally closed switch 364 to open, and the open-circuited inputs BRK6 and BRK8 to linear servo controller 320 (Figure 7A) cause linear servo controller 320 to adjust the speed of motor 50 so as to bring actual motor speed (TACHIN) into coincidence with desired motor speed (MTRSPD).
Figure 7C is a detailed schematic of the chair interlock circuitry 328 of Figure 7A. Basically, chair interlock circuit 328 comprises resistor 330, transient diode 332 and solenoid K1 -- arranged as shown in Figure 7C -- and connected, as shown, both to A.C. power switches 338 and 340 (Figure 7A), and to seat belts 334 (located on the chair 8 (Figure 2)). In operation, actuation of switch S2 (the chair motor "on" switch which, as will be seen below, is located on an operator control section of control panel 54 of Figure 2) causes application of a positive D.C. voltage to solenoid K1 via resistor 330, solenoid K1 actuating A.C. power switches 338 and 340 to the closed position, thus providing A.C. power to the servo controller 320 (Figure 7A). However, it is to be noted that, as a result of operation of the chair interlock circuit 328, solenoid K1 will not be actuated unless the seat belts 334 (located at the chair 8 of Figure 2) are connected, thus closing the circuit between the positive D.C. voltage and ground. In this manner, the chair 8 is equipped with a safety feature whereby A.C. power to the servo controller 320, and thus to the motor 50, will be interrupted should the subject seated in the chair 8 unfasten the seat belts 334.
Motor controller 52 further includes position detection circuitry 336 which, in actual implementation, is located on the chair 8 (Figure 7A) . Specifically, the chair 8 is equipped with a reflective plate 350 which reflects light received from lamp 352 (actuated by a voltage +POSLIT), causing the reflected light to impinge on photodetector 354 so as to generate chair position information POSDET, which information passes through motor controller 52 and control panel 54 (Figure 2) to logic section 62. Signal POSDET indicates that the chair 8 is at a position 90 degrees to the right of its "normal" position.
Motor controller 52 (Figure 7A) also includes a start limit switch 356 (normally open) which, in actual implementation, is located on the chair 8 (Figure 7A). Start limit switch 356, when open, allows signal STRLIM to be "high." However, inasmuch as line STRCOM represents a ground connection, when start limit switch 356 is closed, STRLIM goes "low," and this "low" condition is transmitted via control panel 54 (Figure 2) to logic section 62. As will be seen below, upon operator reset of the system, if start limit switch 356 is open, as indicated by a "high" STRLIM signal, the chair 8 will automatically, under system control, move to its "normal" position, which is attained when the limit switch 356 closes. Figure 7D is a detailed schematic diagram of the dynamic braking relay 322 of Figure 7A. Dynamic braking relay circuit 322 basically comprises relay switches 370 and 372, series-connected resistor 374, actuating solenoid 376, and transient diode 378.
In operation, relay switches 370 and 372 are normally in the downward position so as to pass the LOADLO/LOADHI control current signal of controller 320 to motor 50 (Figure 7A). Input +BRAKE is maintained at a positive voltage ("high") level and relay switches 370 and 372 remain in the normal downward position. Once
Figure imgf000047_0001
goes "low," however, solenoid 376 is actuated, and forces switches 370 and 372 into the upward position. This not only interrupts the provision of control currents signal LOADLO/LOADHI to the motor 50, but also achieves a dynamic braking effect by short-circuiting the input terminals to motor 50, via the short-circuit connection established between switches 370 and 372. Figure 8 is a diagrammatic representation of the relay panel 20 of the CEOG system.
In general, relay panel 20 receives various input control signals from control panel 54 and logic section 62 (Figure 2), and in response thereto, controls the operations of the light source 12, mirrors 14, shutter 66, optokinetic device 16 (comprising motors 74 and 74' and stripe cage 76), the flasher motor 68 and flasher 70. In addition, relay panel 20 receives feedback signals (XBACK and YBACK) from the mirrors 14, and provides these feedback signals, via control panel 54, to logic section 62, wherein -- as will be subsequently described -- compensation for the distortion of the light source projection on the cylindrical walls 18 (Figure 1) of the test station 4 is achieved.
Relay panel 20 receives various D.C. voltage inputs (+12 v. and +15 v.), and an A.C. input (110 v.). The A.C. input to relay panel 20 is merely passed therethrough, so as to provide A.C. power to the laser 12 (Figure 2). The 12 v. D.C. input is provided, via relay switches 402 and 404 and resistor 406, as inputs (LITE1 and LITE2) to the lamp 400 which illuminates the stripe cage 76 (Figure 2).
Specifically, relay switches 402 and 404, which are normally in the open position, are actuated to the closed position by solenoid 408 when
Figure imgf000048_0002
(received from logic section 62) goes "low." On the other hand, in response to
Figure imgf000048_0001
going "high, " solenoid 408 is off, and switches 402 and 404 return to the normally open position, interrupting D.C. power supply to the lamp 400. It is to be noted that relay panel 20 includes a capacitor 412 having its positive terminal connected to power input +RELAY. Capacitor 412 acts as a noise-prevention filter for the +RELAY input (a positive voltage -- for example, 15 volts).
Further referring to Figure 8, relay panel 20 includes switches 422 and 424 which remain in the normally open position so long as input
Figure imgf000048_0003
(from logic section 62 of Figure 2) is "high." However, in response to signal
Figure imgf000048_0004
going "low" (thus commanding turn-on of the stripe cage motor 74), solenoid 420 causes switches 422 and 424 to close, thus defining paths for the input of +12 volts and its return, respectively.
The aforementioned power input paths include switches 416 and 418 which are normally (so long as from logic section 62 remain "high") in the
Figure imgf000048_0005
upward position, so that +12 volts and its return are provided to input terminals A and B, respectively, of motor 74. This power input to motor 74 raises, or maintains in the raised position, the stripe cage 76 of optokinetic device 16.
However, when lowering of the stripe cage 76 is commanded by the operator (in a manner to be described below with reference to Figure 9A), input signal
Figure imgf000049_0003
goes "low," resulting in actuation of switches 416 and 418 (by solenoid 414) to the downward position. This effectively reverses the polarity of D.C. input, so that +12 volts and its return are provided to terminals B and A, respectively, of motor 74. Accordingly, motor 74 operates in the reverse direction to lower the stripe cage 76 of optokinetic device 16.
Moreover, motor 74 generates status output signals LIMUPOK or LIMDNOK when the stripe cage 76 is raised to its upper limit or lowered to its lower limit, respectively.
Relay panel 20 also includes an arrangement of switches and solenoids for controlling the raising and lowering of the flasher 70 by motor 68. Specifically, switches 428 and 430 remain in the normal upward
Figure imgf000049_0002
position so long as input signal applied to solenoid 432, stays "high" -- indicating a desire on the part of the operator to maintain the motor 68 in the "off" condition. In fact, switches 428 and 430, when in the upward position, create a short circuit across the power input terminals of motor 68.
However, in response to an operator command for turn-on of the motor 68,
Figure imgf000049_0001
goes "low," resulting in actuation of switches 428 and 430 to the downward position, thus establishing a power input path to terminals A, B and C of motor 68. Then, motor 68 is caused to raise or lower the flasher 70 in accordance with the position of switch 432 -- the upward position causing the application of a positive voltage to terminal A of motor 68, thus lowering flasher 70, and the lowermost position of switch 432 resulting in the application of a positive voltage to terminal B of motor 68, causing raising of the flasher 70. More specifically, input
Figure imgf000050_0001
remains in the "high" state so long as raising of the flasher 70 is desired, and switch 434 accordingly remains in the lowermost position. Conversely, when goes "low,"
Figure imgf000050_0002
solenoid 436 actuates switch 434 to the uppermost position, and lowering of the flasher 70 by the motor 68 is effected (provided, of course, that relay 432 is also actuated).
Relay panel 20 of Figure 8 receives input signals -CGMTR and +CGMTR from control panel 54 (Figure 2), and supplies same to motor 74' for the purpose of controlling the speed of rotation of the stripe cage 76 by motor 74'.
Relay panel 20 also receives inputs -SHUT and +SHUT from control panel 54, and provides same to shutter 66 (Figure 2) for the purpose of opening and closing the shutter 66 in response thereto.
Furthermore, relay panel 20 provides D.C. power to the mirrors 14, and as well provides output signals XDRIVE and YDRIVE (received from logic section 62 via control panel 54) to the mirrors 14 for the purpose of driving the mirrors in the X and Y directions, respectively. Relay panel 20 also receives, from mirrors 14, the X and Y position signals XBACK and YBACK which are provided to logic section 62 (via control panel 54) for the purpose of developing the POSX and POSY status inputs to processor 34 via interface 30.
The control panel 54 of Figure 2 will now be described in more detail with reference to Figures 9A through 9E.
The control panel 54 (Figure 2) basically serves two purposes. First, it is used as a junction box to distribute power throughout the system, and to act as a common distribution point for most of the control and status signals passing through the CEOG system. Secondly, it serves the usual function of a control panel -- visibly, allowing the operator to interact with the system by means of switches and display indicators. In the preferred embodiment, the former function -- that of a junction box -- is served by having one cable from each functional unit (for example, as seen in Figure 2) to the control panel, as opposed to having a plurality of cables passing throughout the system between the various functional units.
Figure 9A is a diagrammatic representation of the operator control section of the control panel 54 of the CEOG system.
In general, the operator control section 450 of control panel 54 comprises a plurality of display indicators (DS), switches (S), and adjustment knobs connected to potentiometers (P). Moreover, the various display indicators, switches and adjustment knobs can be divided into various categories relating to power, chair control, stripe cage operations, flasher operations, and light source (laser) and mirror operations.
Operator control section 450 includes an A.C. power switch S1, by means of which the system is turned on and A.C. power is supplied thereto. Application of A.C. power is indicated by display indicator DS1. As indicated previously, with respect to Figure 2, application of A.C. power to the CEOG system, and specifically to power supply 60 thereof, results in generation of various D.C. supply voltages. Returning to Figure 9A, operator control section 450 includes various display indicators DS2, DS3, DS4 and DS5, indicating availability of the various D.C. power supply voltages -- +5 v., -15 v., +15 v., and +12 v., respectively.
Operator control section 450 also includes a switch S2 for turning on the motor 50 (Figure 2) for the purpose of powering the chair 8. Display indicator DS6 indicates when the motor 50 is turned on. Moreover, a desired speed of the motor 50, and thus a desired speed of revolution of the chair 8, is selected by the operator by means of adjustment knob P1 which is connected to a potentiometer (not shown) for generating the signal MTRSPD applied to the motor controller 52 (Figure 2), and specifically to the linear servo controller 320 thereof (Figure 7A) .
Operator control section 450 of Figure 9A also includes switches S3 and S4 for causing momentary stopping and starting, respectively, of the chair 8 (Figure 2), and a display indicator DS7 indicating when a "CHAIR READY" condition exists.
In addition, operator control section 450 includes a reset switch S5, which is preferably a momentary switch comprising a manual reset button which is utilized for a multitude of purposes, visibly: (1) to cause the rotatable chair 8 (Figure 2) to be rotated to its normal (reset) position; and (2) to clear a number of computer bits such as SCAN (referring to mirror scanning) and RECORDING ON DISK (to be discussed below).
Operator control section 450 also includes switches S7 and S8 for raising and lowering, respectively, the stripe cage 76 (Figure 2). Preferably, switches S7 and S8 are one-shot push-button switches for raising and lowering, respectively, the stripe cage 76 in response to a single push of the respective buttons S7 nd S8. Moreover, operator control section 450 includes an adjustment knob P2 connected to a potentiometer (not shown) -- preferably, a 10-turn potentiometer -- for adjusting the speed of rotation of the stripe cage 76 (Figure 2). Operator control section 450 also includes an on-off switch S11 for activating-deactivating a linear light bulb 400 (Figure 8) inside the stripe cage 76 (Figure 2). Also provided is a three-position switch S14 having positions "left" and "right" for designating respective leftward and rightward directions of rotation of the stripe cage 76, and an "off" position for turning off the rotatable stripe cage 76.
Operator control section 450 also includes display indicator DS8 for indicating the "stripes ready" condition, display indicator DS9 (RECORDING ON DISK) which is an indicator that flashes when the computer is transferring data to the disk (so that the system operator will not inadvertently fill the disk to full capacity) and push-button switches S9 and S10 for raising and lowering, respectively, the flasher 70 (Figure 2).
Moreover, operator control section 450 includes adjustment knobs P3 and P4 for controlling the horizontal speed and vertical position, respectively, of the light generated by the light source (laser) 12 (Figure 12). Specifically, adjustment knob P3 is connected to a potentiometer (not shown) -- preferably, a 10-turn potentiometer -- for controlling the horizontal speed of the light spot seen by the subject 2 (Figure 2), such light spot being controlled as a result of movement of the mirrors 14 reflecting the light from the laser 12, such movement of the mirrors 14 being in turn controlled by the potentiometer (not shown) as set by the operator via adjustment of knob P3. Vertical position of the light spot seen by the subject 2 is controlled by adjustment of the laser 12 via the potentiometer (not shown) as set by the adjustment knob P4.
Operator control section 450 also, preferably, includes a manual function switch S12, by means of which the position of the light spot generated by the laser 12 and mirrors 14 (Figure 2) can be controlled in accordance with various functions -- for example, an alternating square wave function, alternating ramp function, and alternating sine wave function.
Operator control section 450 includes a toggle switch S13 for operator selection of the "set-up" or "automatic" modes of operation of the light source 12 and mirrors 14 (Figure 2). That is to say, designation of the "set-up" mode of operation causes the subject 2 to be subjected to light source stimuli in accordance with a pattern selected by the physician administering the test by means of a previously explained control contained in the operator control section 450. Conversely, designation of the "automatic" mode of operation causes the subject 2 to be subjected to light stimuli as controlled by the computer (processor) 34 of the CEOG system.
Operator control section 450 includes a test warning indicator DS10, which is actuated when testing of or adjustment to the system is being performed
(such as manual running of the chair 8 (Figure 2) by means of a manual switch located in one of the portions L3' (Figure 10G) of logic section 62 (Figure 2)). As will be seen below, another "test warning" condition consists of the release of the electromagnetic brake on the chair 8 (Figure 2) so that the chair 8 can be turned manually away from its normal (reset) position.
Operator control section 450 also includes a display indicator DS11 for indicating the "scan" mode of operation of the CEOG system, and a switch S6 for designating that the number of turns through which the chair 8 (Figure 2) is to be rotated is as indicated (automatically) by the computer processor 34 of the CEOG system.
Figures 9B through 9E are detailed schematic diagrams of the control panel 54 of the CEOG system.
More specifically, Figure 9B is a detailed schematic diagram relating to the power distribution functions performed by the control panel 54 of Figure 2, as well as relating to the on-off A.C. power switch (S1) and various display indicators (DS1, DS2, etc.) appearing in the operator control section 450 of the control panel 54. As seen in Figure 9B, actuation of the switch S1 causes A.C. power in to be distributed -- via terminal board TB1 -- to various parts of the CEOG system via connector terminals J103, J110 (terminals E, F, and G thereof), etc. As previously mentioned, power supply 60 (Figure 2), in response to actuation of A.C. power in the system, generates D.C. supply voltages (for example, +5 v., +12 v., ±15 v., etc.), as needed.
Further referring to Figure 9B, the condition "A.C. power on" is indicated by display indicator DS1. Similarly, generation of the D.C. supply voltages mentioned above is indicated by respective display indicators DS2 through DS5.
Finally, certain of the modes of operation or conditions of the CEOG system are indicated by display indicators DS7 through DS10. Specifically, in accordance with the arrangement shown in Figure 9B, occurrence of a "chair ready" condition causes one terminal of display indicator DS7 to go "low" (as indicated by
Figure imgf000056_0001
) , and this grounding of one side of display indicator DS7 causes application of a +15 volt D.C. voltage to display indicator DS7, resulting in visual display of the "chair ready" condition. In a similar manner, display indicators DS8 through DS10 indicate the "stripes ready,"
"recording," and "test warning" conditions or modes of operation, respectively.
Referring to Figure 9C, circuit 456 receives an input MTRSPD1, provided (as will be seen below) by logic portion L3 (Figure 10F), which converts the digital signals RUNFWD, RUNBKD and RUNSLOW to analog signals. Circuit 456 (Figure 9C) -- by means of a voltage divider comprising resistor 458 and the resistance of potentiometer 460 (which is set by adjustment knob P1 (Figure 9A)) -- produces output MTRSPD which, as previously mentioned, is an analog signal provided to motor controller 52 -- specifically, linear servo controller 320 thereof -- for the purpose of controlling the speed of rotation of the chair 8 (Figure 2) to a desired speed in accordance with the operator setting of potentiometer 460 (Figure 9C).
Circuit 462 shows switch S2, by means of which the motor power supply for operation of the chair 8 (Figure 2) is turned on. Display indicator DS6 indicates "motor power on" when the chair motor is powered on, and output signals MTPWR and MTRSWON (to be discussed below) are produced in the process.
Circuit 464 in Figure 9C includes switch S3 which is a momentary switch which, upon actuation, is momentarily moved from an "up" position to a "down" position, thus transferring a ground condition from terminals
Figure imgf000057_0003
to terminals STOPSW. As will be seen below (with reference to portion L2' of Figure 10D), terminals STOPSW and
Figure imgf000057_0001
are used to set and reset, respectively, a no-bounce switch 750.
Circuit 466 includes switch S4 which operates in the same manner as switch S3 to selectively produce ground conditions at terminals STRSW and
Figure imgf000057_0004
Moreover, in a similar manner, circuit 468 selectively produces ground conditions at RSTSW and
Figure imgf000057_0002
Circuit 470 includes switch S6 (a toggle switch) which, in its upward or closed position, designates local control of the number of turns or revolutions which the chair 8 (Figure 2) is to take before being stopped. The number of turns or revolutions is locally designated by the operator utilizing a decoded thumb-wheel switch S21-S24 located in logic portion L1' of Figure 10B (to be discussed below). When not in the upward or closed position, switch S6 turns control of the number of revolutions of the chair 8 (Figure 2) over to the computer for automatic control thereof. Circuit 472 includes potentiometer 474 associated with adjustment knob P2 (Figure 9A), by means of which stripe speed is designated as a result of voltage division of a +15 volt input between resistor 476 and potentiometer 474, providing an analog output
STRIPESPD designating the speed of revolution of the stripe cage 76 (Figure 2).
Circuits 478 and 480 includes switches S7 and S8, respectively, which, in response to actuation thereof, generate outputs
Figure imgf000058_0004
and
Figure imgf000058_0005
respectively, designating upward and downward movement, respectively, of the cage 76 (Figure 2).
Circuit 482 includes switch S13 which, in its upward position, provides output
Figure imgf000058_0001
calling for the mirrors 14 (Figure 2) to move in accordance with the setting of manual function switch S12 (in operator control section 450 of Figure 9A). Switch S13 -- in its lower position -- turns control of the mirrors 14 over to the computer processor 34 (Figure 2) for automatic control thereof.
Circuit 484 includes display indicator DS11 which is actuated by a +15 volt input in response to terminal
Figure imgf000058_0002
going "low." Terminal
Figure imgf000058_0003
goes "low" as a result of logic operations performed in portion L9 (Figure 10L), as will be described in more detail below, when: (1) the setup switch S13 is "on,"
(2) the computer is scanning in the X direction, and
(3) the computer is scanning in the Y direction.
Circuits 486 and 488 include switches S9 and S10, respectively, which operate in the same manner as previously described with respect to circuits 464 and 466. The output conditions at terminal UPFLSW, DWNFLSW, etc. in circuits 486 and 488 are utilized to set/reset no-bounce switches contained in portion L4' (Figure 10I).
Circuit 490 includes switch S11 which, in response to actuation thereof, issues output signal STRPSW indicating "turn on" of the light 400 (Figure 8) in stripe cage 76 (Figure 2).
Circuit 492 includes switch S12 by means of which three scanning functions for scanning of the light source 12 (Figure 2) -- under control of the mirrors 14 -- may be chosen. Specifically, output signals
Figure imgf000059_0002
and
Figure imgf000059_0001
are provided in correspondence to desired scanning in accordance with square wave, triangular (or ramp function) and sine wave functions, respectively. Circuit 494 includes potentiometer 496 corresponding to adjustment knob P3 (Figure 9A), by means of which horizontal speed of the mirrors 14 (Figure 2) can be chosen. Circuit 494 produces output signal OSREF, which designates the desired horizontal scanning speed of the mirrors 14 relative to lowermost and uppermost reference speeds determined by the voltage dividing resistors 498 and 500, respectively.
Circuit 502 discloses potentiometer 504 corresponding to adjustment knob P4 (Figure 9A) , by means of which vertical positioning of the beam from light source 12 is adjusted. As a result of such adjustment, circuit 502 performs voltage division by means of potentiometer 504 so as to provide output signal VERTPOS indicating the desired vertical positioning of the beam from light source 12. It is to be noted that, as will be seen below in connection with the discussion of portion L10 (Figure 10M), potentiometer 504 acts in parallel with the MOVY input from the computer, and with any other signals which are summed in a summing amplifier of portion L10, to develop the. output YDRIVE, by means of which the desired vertical positioning of the beam from light source 12 is achieved. Turning to Figure 9D, circuit 506 discloses switch S14 (Figure 9A), by means of which leftward or rightward movement, or stopping, of the stripe cage 76 (Figure 2) is achieved. Leftward movement of the stripe cage 76 corresponds to output -CGMTR, while rightward movement of the stripe cage 76 corresponds to output +CGMTR -- these two output signals being provided to relay panel 20 (Figure 8), and thence to motor 74' so as to achieve leftward or rightward movement, respectively, of the stripe cage 76 (Figure 2 ) under the control of the motor 74'.
As can be seen from circuit 506 of Figure 9D, switch S14 has an "off" position whereby neither leftward nor rightward movement of the stripe cage 76 is designated. Moreover, as seen in Figure 9D, circuit 506 further comprises a switch S14' which is gang-connected to switch S14, and which generates
Figure imgf000060_0003
outputs
Figure imgf000060_0004
and in response to actuation of switch S14 to the "left" and "right" position, respectively. The outputs
Figure imgf000060_0002
and
Figure imgf000060_0001
are provided as status signals to logic section 62 (Figure 2).
Referring to Figure 9E, further circuits 530 through 533 are shown, which circuits are utilized for converting various control signals to driver signals. Specifically, circuit 530 converts signals TWLON (Test Warning Light On) and CHRDYON (Chair Ready On) to signals which can light display indicators DS10 and DS7, respectively (Figure 9A) . Circuit 531 supplies a regulated +12.3 volts, called +RELAY, which signal -- as will be recalled with respect to Figure 8 -- is provided to relay panel 20 for the purpose of powering certain previously described solenoid/relay switch combinations. Circuit 532 converts input signals RELBRK
(Release Brake), LITEON (Light On), FLMTRON (Flasher Motor On), FLSHDWN (Flasher Down), TRMTRON (Stripe Cage Motor On), and TRMTRDN (Stripe Cage Down) to their corresponding driver signals. Finally, circuit 533 converts input signal STRIPESPD -- from the "center wiper" of the potentiometer 474 (Figure 9C) associated with adjustment knob P2 (Figure 9A) -- to output signals +CGMTR and -CGMTR provided to relay panel 20 (Figure 8 ) , and thence to motor 74' for the purpose of turning the stripe cage 76 (Figure 2) at a given speed. The latter is accomplished by circuit 533 under the influence of further input TRNCG (Turn Cage) provided (via resistor 536) to the base of transistor 535, the latter pulling -CGMTR to ground so as to turn on the stripe cage motor 74' (Figure 8).
At this juncture, a short description of operator usage of operator control section 450 (Figure 9A), with reference to the various other Figures 9B through 9E, is appropriate. Specifically, a short description of the usage of operator control section 450 will be given for both the EOG and VER tests.
In order to conduct EOG and VER tests, the operator can take the following actions: (1) fie will power-up the CEOG system by actuating switch S1 on operator control section 450 (Figure 9A), thus distributing A.C. power and various D.C. supply voltages to various parts of the CEOG system, as previously described with reference to Figure 9B.
(2) The operator will then actuate switch S13 (Figure 9A), causing generation of signal SETUP by circuit 482 (Figure 9C). At this juncture, shutter 66 (Figure 2) will be opened, and it will be possible to submit the patient 2 to light stimulation as generated by light source (lasar) 12 in conjunction with mirrors 14. In the
"set-up" mode of operation, mirrors 14 will scan the X direction in accordance with the particular manual function previously designated by the operator utilizing switch S12 in operator control section 450 (Figure
9A -- see also circuit 492 of Figure 9C). Moreover, the Y position of the mirror will be determined by a combination of the setting of adjustment knob P4 (and potentiometer circuit 502) and a MOVY command from computer processor 34 (Figure 2), as will be discussed in more detail below. The scanning speed of mirrors 14 (Figure 2) will be determined by the setting of adjustment knob P3 (in conjunction with potentiometer circuit 494), and will preferably yield a scanning cycle time of from 0.8 seconds to 10 seconds duration. During the "scanning" mode of operation, this mode of operation will be indicated on display indicator DS11 (see circuit 484 of Figure 9C).
(3) As previously mentioned, switch S13 is a toggle switch, such that subsequent toggling of switch S13 will result in "automatic" mode of scanning. As a result of entering this mode of operation, scanning will be performed under computer control. Moreover, the computer processor 34 can be programmed to completely and exclusively control the scanning pattern, speed, etc. to which the subject 2 is subjected. In the alternative, the computer can be programmed so that scanning can be controlled as to the scanning pattern in accordance with whichever scanning function is manually selected at switch S12, and can also be controlled so as to cause the horizontal speed of scanning to be in accordance with whatever horizontal speed is set manually at adjustment knob P3 of operator control section 450. As a further alternative, the computer processor 34 can be programmed to cause vertical scanning to be conducted in accordance with whatever speed is set on adjustment knob P3 (even though adjustment knob P3 is normally utilized to merely designate horizontal speed of scanning).
(4) The operator can reset the system by actuating switch S5 which, with reference to Figure 9C, will cause generation of signal RSTSW which, as will be seen below, will be received and processed in logic section 62
(Figure 2). The CEOG system can be utilized to conduct further EOG tests -- for example, a test can be performed utilizing operator control section 450 to control rotatable chair 3 (Figure 1), as follows:
(1) The system is powered on by actuating switch S1 (as discussed above with respect to the EOG test).
(2) The chair motor is activated by actuating switch S2 (such being indicated by display indicator DS6). As previously discussed, this results in generation of signal MTRPWR by circuit 462 (Figure 9C).
(3) The operator resets the system by actuation of switch S5, which -- via circuit 468 of Figure 9C -- results in generation of RSTSW which is provided to logic section 62 (Figure 2). At this juncture, the chair will seek its normal (reset) position, ready for rotation, and the "chair ready" condition is indicated by display indicator DS7. (4) The operator can now enter data relating to, for example, the number of turns to be performed by the chair, utilizing terminal 44 (Figure 2) -- this will be explained in more detail below. (5) By pushing switch S4, the operator can now cause the chair to rotate through the designated number of turns.
(6) By pushing S3, the operator can stop the chair prior to the predesignated number of turns, at which time a blinking CHAIR READY light will be seen at display indicator DS7.
(7) The operator can now restart chair rotation by actuating switch S4, and the predesignated number of turns will be completed. At the completion of the predesignated number of turns, the chair will automatically stop, and a blinking CHAIR READY indicator will be seen at display indicator DS7.
(8) The CEOG system can be programmed (as will be seen subsequently) to continue rotation, but this time in the counter-clockwise direction (presuming that the previous direction of rotation was clockwise), in response to further actuation of switch S4.
(9) During the operation, as previously described, the operator can either press a computer console button calling for a hard-copy printout of the test results, or can type a predesignated character (such as the character "R" ) on the console of the computer so as to record the test results on a more permanent storage (such as disk 42 (Figure 2)).
(10) As will be seen in more detail below, the system can operate in an "automatic reset" mode of operation, by which reverse chair rotation will take place in a "slow mode" of operation, and the CEOG system will seek a
"limit switch" setting -- corresponding to a normal (reset) position -- at which time chair rotation will be stopped. This will be explained in more detail below.
(11) Finally, as will also be seen below, switch S6 gives the operator the alternatives of "local" control or "computer" control of the number of turns through which the chair 8 (Figure 2) is to pass prior to being automatically stopped. As will be recalled from previous discussion, the number of turns through which the rotating chair is to pass can be locally designated by actuation of a decoded thumbwheel switch S21-S24 in portion LI' (Figure 10B) of logic section 62 (Figure 2) . In administering tests to the subject 2, operator console section 450 (Figure 9A) can be utilized to control the stripe cage 76 (Figure 2). Thus, by means of one-shot actuation of push-button switch S8, the stripe cage 76 will be lowered into position. At that juncture, if switch S11 has been actuated to the "on" mode, and if switch S14 is set to either the "left" or "right" position -- that is, not to the "off" position -- then the linear light bulb 400 (Figure 8) will come on, and stripe cage 76 will begin to rotate immediately upon arriving at its lowermost position. Actuation of switch S7 at any time during the test will result in automatic cessation of the rotation of stripe cage 76, as well as turn-off of light bulb 400, and the stripe cage 76 will be raised to its uppermost position. As previously discussed, control of the speed of rotation of stripe cage 76 is achieved through adjustment knob P2 and the associated potentiometer 474 in circuit 472 (Figure 9C). Display indicator DS8 indicates the "stripes ready" condition. Display indicator DS9 is a RECORDING ON DISK indicator which reminds the operator that test data from the subject 2 is being recorded on disk 42 (Figure 2).
Figures 10A through 10N are detailed logic block diagrams and circuit schematics of the logic section 62 of the CEOG system. Logic section 62 (Figure 2) receives electronic signals from three sources: the computer processor 34 via EOG interface 30 (Figure 2), the switches on the control panel (Figure 9A) and associated circuitry (Figures 9B through 9E), and other units or elements of the CEOG system (as will be described below). The logic section 62 processes all of these incoming signals, and produces control and indicator signals that are distributed to the remainder of the CEOG system. Logic section 62 will, for the purpose of the discussion below, be divided into logic section portions L1 through L5 and L8 through L11, each of which will now be considered in detail.
Figures 10A and 10B are detailed logic diagrams/ schematics of the portions L1 and L1', respectively, of logic section 62 (Figure 2). Portions of L1 and L1' of logic section 62 basically perform the following four functions:
(1) automatic system initialization for "power-on";
(2) system reset;
(3) test-warning-light generation; and
(4) counter and comparator operations to determine how many turns the chair 8 (Figure 2) should make.
Referring to Figures 9A and 10A, when the system is turned on -- by actuation of switch S1 -- various D.C. and A.C. voltages are caused to flow throughout the system. In response to reception of D.C. input, timer 628 in portion L1 (Figure 10A) is triggered to issue output The latter is provided to NAND gate 608 -- which performs an OR operation -- so as to issue output RST and (via inverter 612) output
Figure imgf000067_0002
The output of NAND gate 608 is provided to a one-shot device 616 which -- since its
Figure imgf000068_0002
output is provided, as an enabling input, to NAND gate 608 -- insures that the RST (and ) output is a square pulse of duration
Figure imgf000068_0001
no less than 0.1 seconds. In other words, one-shot device 616 protects the RST output from being immediately turned off -- as, for example, by reception of a "high" signal from NAND gate 626 if NEARRST or ZERO go "low." This will be more clearly understood from the discussion below. In addition, NAND gate 608 is caused to issue the output RST upon setting of the no-bounce switch 600 (NAND gates 602 and 604 connected as shown) upon receipt of the "high" RSTSW input, provided by operator actuation of switch S5 in operator control section 450 (Figure 9A) -- see also circuit 468 (Figure 9C).
Finally, NAND gate 608 is caused to issue the RST output as a result of inputs ZERO and NEARRST (received by NAND gate 626) both being "high" or "on." Input ZERO is an output provided by decoder 664 in portion L1' (Figure 10B) which, as will be seen below, indicates that the chair has been rotated in the reverse direction by a prescribed number of turns. In a related manner, input NEARRST is an output of portion L2' (Figure 10D) which, as will be seen below, is a control signal indicating that the chair is in the "backward rotation" mode of operation. Thus, as a result of the operation of NAND gates 608 and 626 (Figure 10A), the RST output will be issued -- indicating reset of the CEOG system -- whenever the chair has been rotated in a backward direction a prescribed number of turns so that a down-count to zero has been achieved. Further referring to Figure 10A, circuit 632 comprises a timer 634 which provides, at its Q output, an oscillator output BLINK applied to various selected display indicators to achieve a "blinking" effect. For example, the test warning indicator DS10 (Figure 9A) can be caused to blink by application thereto of output BLINK of circuit 632 (Figure 10A). Furthermore, circuit 632 includes a NAND gate 638 which performs an OR-type operation with respect to inputs
Figure imgf000069_0001
and
Figure imgf000069_0002
so that the output TWLON (Test Warning Light On) is issued in the presence of either input
Figure imgf000069_0003
or
Figure imgf000069_0004
and input BLINK. As will be seen below,
Figure imgf000069_0005
goes "high" whenever a particular test function is to be performed (for example, when the chair is to be manually controlled for rotation via actuation of switches SA and SB in portion L3 (Figure 10F)). Moreover, input
Figure imgf000069_0006
is produced by portion L1' (Figure 10B) whenever the number of turns through which the chair is to rotate, as set by the operator, exceeds an allowed value.
Referring to portion L1' of Figure 10B, it will be recalled that the number of turns through which the chair 8 is to be rotated can be designated under computer control as entered on a computer console or terminal 44 (Figure 2), or under local control via presetting of a thumbwheel switch consisting of switches S21, through S24 (Figure 10B). Thus, multiplexer (MUX) 650 receives and multiplexes turn information either generated by the computer as bits 1-4 from the processor 34 (Figure 2), or locally designated via switches S21-S24. The multiplexed output of multiplexer 650 is provided to latch circuit 652 which provides its latched output to the A0-A3 inputs of comparator circuit 654. Circuit 656 of portion L1' of Figure 10B responds to an input POSDET (representing chair position information), and -- via analog comparator 658 and NAND gate 660 -- generates output POSCLK whenever a reflective strip 350 (Figure 7A) on the chair is detected by photodetector 354. Output POSCLK provides a clocking input at the CK terminal of counter 662 which is an up-down counter for up-counting the number of chair revolutions (for example, during clockwise rotation), and for conversely down-counting the number of chair revolutions (for example, during counter-clockwise chair rotation). The outputs QA-QD of Counter 662 provide the B0-B3 inputs to comparator 654. Thus, digital comparator 654 compares the desired number of chair revolutions to the actual number of chair revolutions, and when the two coincide, comparator 654 generates the output MATCH.
Counter 662 is enabled, for counting, by the logical input
Figure imgf000070_0001
(provided by a GO flip-flop 752 in portion L2 of Figure 10D, to be discussed below). Counter 662 is reset upon occurrence of
Figure imgf000070_0002
(indicating system reset). Up or down counting of counter 662 is determined by the logical input DOWN (provided by up/down flip-flop 772 of portion L2 of Figure 10D). The outputs QA-QD of counter 662 are provided to decoder 664 which issues a
Figure imgf000070_0004
output upon occurrence of a complete chair cycle (clockwise rotation followed by counter-clockwise rotation). The
Figure imgf000070_0003
output has already been discussed with reference to circuit 618 (Figure 10A). Returning to circuit 656 (Figure 10B), the output of comparator 658 is provided to a monostable device 666 which generates a
Figure imgf000071_0001
output to NAND gate 660 so that output POSCLK will have a minimum time duration in response to either the output from comparator 658 and/or that from monostable device 666.
Circuit 668 of portion L1' comprises NAND gates 670, 672 and 674, and inverters 676 and 678, which provide a clock input to latch circuit 652 under either of the following two conditions:
(1) When the number of rotations of the chair is to be locally controlled, as designated by closing of the switch S6 of Figure 10B, latching of data by latch circuit 652 is controlled by the RST (Reset) signal received at AND gate 674 (enabled by an input from the switch S6 via inverter 676), and provided to the CLK input of latch 652 via OR gate 672 and inverter 678. (2) When the number of rotations of the chair is to be computer-controlled, as indicated by opening of the switch S6, latching of data by latch circuit 652 is controlled by STROBX (a computer-generated strobe signal) provided via AND gate 670 (enabled by an enabling input from switch S6), OR gate 672 and inverter 678. It will be recalled that switch S6 is a toggle switch correspondingly designated in operator control section 450 (Figure 9A). Closing of the switch results in a ground connection, resulting in a "low" input to AND gate 670 (disabling computer-controlled latching) and resulting in a "high" (inverted "low") input to enable AND gate 674 for reset-controlled latching of data. Conversely, opening of switch S6 results in application of a +5 volt ( "high") input to enable AND gate 670 for computer-controlled latching, and to disable AND gate 674 to preclude reset-controlled latching.
Finally, referring to circuit 656 in Figure 10B, input POSDET as previously mentioned, is an analog signal produced when light is detected from a reflective strip 350 on chair 8 (Figure 7A). Such light is detected by comparator 658 (Figure 10B), the negative input of which is adjusted by level-detector potentiometer P2. When light is detected, comparator 658 triggers one-shot device 666 (preferably, having a one-shot duration of .25 seconds) so as to maintain an output POSCLK issuing from NAND gate 660 connected to the output of comparator 658. That is to say, NAND gate 660 performs an OR operation between the outputs of comparator 658 and one-shot 666. Thus, circuit 656 insures that output POSCLK is of minimum acceptable duration, and output POSCLK is provided as a clocking input to counter 662 (for counting chair rotations), and as a further input to portion L2 ' (Figure 10D), as will be discussed below.
Figures 10C, 10D(1) and 10E are detailed schematics of further portions L2, L2 ' and L2 " , respectively, of logic section 62 of Figure 2. Figure 10D(2) is a timing diagram for explaining the timing of the operations of portion L2' of Figure 10D(1).
Basically, portions L2, L2' and L2" receive input signals STRSW (start switch), STOPSW (stop switch), RST (reset),
Figure imgf000072_0001
(start limit switch), and MATCH (indicating that the number of counts of chair revolutions matches the predetermined value). Portions L2, L2' and L2" provide logic circuitry for performing various logic functions so as to provide the following signals in proper sequence: CHRDYON (Chair Ready On), RUNIB (Run Motor), RELBRK (Release Brake), FWD (Go Forward),
Figure imgf000073_0005
(Run Slowly), and DOWN (Count Down). As will be seen below, other input/output signals are received/provided as well. Referring specifically to portion L2 of Figure 10C, three flip-flop devices (cross-coupled NAND gates) are provided, as follows: (1) A Run flip-flop (NAND gates 700) which provides via inverter 701 an output RUNIB when the chair motor is running, such output being provided to portion L3' (Figure 10G). The output
Figure imgf000073_0004
from flip-flop 700 is OR'ed (in NAND gate 702) with input
Figure imgf000073_0003
to provide output RELBRK (Release Brake) either when the motor is running (as indicated by RUNIB) or when manual rotation of the chair is indicated (by
Figure imgf000073_0002
from portion L3' of Figure 10G).
(2) A Forward/Backward flip-flop (NAND gates 704) which issues an output FWD which is "high" when the chair is being driven in the forward direction, or "low" when the chair is being driven in the backward direction.
(3) A Run Slow flip-flop (NAND gates 706) which issues an output
Figure imgf000073_0001
which is "low" when the chair is running slow. It is to be noted that the chair runs slow only in the backward direction, as dictated by the application of output FWD from NAND gate 704 via inverter 708 to device 706 (lowermost NAND gate thereof). It is to be further noted that device 706 is set by input
Figure imgf000074_0004
such that the resetting of the system by the operator causes the chair to rotate slowly in the backward direction, this being done for the purpose of centering the chair in its normal (reset) position. It will be recalled that resetting of the CEOG system results in generation (as previously discussed) of signal RST. Referring to Figure 10C, input RST is provided via inverter 710 to flip-flop 712, causing resetting of flip-flop 712. As a result, the output
Figure imgf000074_0001
(to NAND gate 714) is "high."
Figure imgf000074_0005
goes "low" when the chair 8 finds the start limit switch 356, and NAND gate 714 provides the output CHRDYON. It will be noted that CHRDYON is also produced when signal
Figure imgf000074_0002
-- a signal produced by a Hold flip-flop to be discussed in connection with Figure 10D(1) below -- goes "low." Moreover, it will be recalled that the signal CHRDYON (Chair Ready On) is provided to a circuit 530 (Figure 9E), wherein it is converted to an output
Figure imgf000074_0003
which in turn is responsible for activation of display indicator DS7 (Figure 9B), which indicates the "chair ready" condition. Further referring to Figure 10C, resetting of the system results in application of signal RST via inverter 710 as a clock input to Check Mechanical Ready flip-flop 716, causing a Q output therefrom to NAND gate 718. When the start limit switch 356 at the chair 8 (Figure 7A) is open -- indicating that the chair is not at its normal (reset) position -- signal STRLIM is high (+5 volts), and the output STRLIM of inverter 720 is "low," with the result that the output of NAND gate 722 (which performs an AND operation between STRLIM and the Q output of flip-flop 716) is "high." At the same time, the output of NAND gate 718 -- as a result of application of "high" inputs (
Figure imgf000075_0006
and Q of flip-flop 716) thereto -- maintains a "low" output
Figure imgf000075_0005
applied to the "set" terminal of Run flip-flop 700. This indicates that the chair 8 (Figure 7A) is looking for its normal (reset) position. In fact, the
Figure imgf000075_0004
is applied, as a "set" input, to Forward/Backward flip-flop 704 so that the output thereof FWD is "low, " indicating the "backward" mode of rotation. At the same time, the signal
Figure imgf000075_0003
is applied to the "set" input of Run Slow flip-flop 706, causing output RSLOW to go "low," indicating slow rotation of the chair. Thus, to summarize, the "reset" mode of operation results in the chair 8 (Figure 7A) being rotated slowly in the backward direction, in search of its normal (reset) position. When the normal (reset) position is reached, the start limit switch 356 is hit, causing
Figure imgf000075_0001
to go "low" and STRLIM to go
"high." As a result, NAND gate 718 turns "off," and NAND gate 722 goes "low, " thus resetting Run flip-flop 700. Accordingly, output
Figure imgf000075_0002
of flip-flop 700 goes "high," and output RUNIB goes "low" (causing turn-off of the motor 8 (Figure 7B)), while output RELBRK goes "low," causing activation of fail-safe circuit 326 (Figures 7A and 7D), linear servo controller 320 and dynamic braking relay 322, so as to apply braking action to the motor 50, thus stopping rotation of the chair 8.
Futhermore, when STRLIM (from inverter 720) and the Q output of flip-flop 716 go "low," the resulting "high" output of NAND gate 722 sets flip-flop 712, and MECRDY goes "on." Later, when it is necessary to reεet the flip-flop 712, this is done with signal GOB (from Figure 10D) -- which starts the chair 8 (Figure 1) turning -- signal GOB being AND'ed with RUN (from the lower NAND gate in flip-flop 700) so as to insure that the Run flip-flop 700 has been turned on before the Mechanical Ready flip-flop 712 is turned off, this being necessary because MECRDY assists in the generation of signal GOB through NAND gate 752 (see Figure 10D(1)). It is to be noted further that the reset (R) input of Check Mechanical Ready flip-flop 716 is connected to NAND gate 728 via resistor 730 (the latter being grounded by grounding capacitor 732). Thus, NAND gate 728 performs an AND operation with respect to the inputs thereto. Specifically, when
Figure imgf000076_0001
goes "high," and when the output of inverter 732 goes "high" as a result of NAND gate 722 issuing a "low" output, and further when the Q output (MECRDY) of flip-flop 712 goes "high," the Check Mechanical Ready flip-flop 716 is reset, resulting in removal of the Q input from NAND gates 718 and 722, respectively.
Thus, as explained above, resetting of the system results -- as previously described -- in slow, backward rotation of the chair until a normal (reset) position is arrived at, detected by actuation of the start limit switch 356 at the chair 8 (Figure 7A).
Referring now to Figure 10D(1), the operation of starting rotation of the chair will be explained. Actuation of start switch S4 (Figures 9A and 9C) results in generation of signal STRSW (as previously discussed), and this signal -- as received by portion L2 ' of Figure 10D(1) -- sets the no-bounce switch (flip-flop device) 750, NAND gate 752 -- which performs an AND operation with respect to the input MECRDY (Mechanical Chair Ready) from flip-flop 712 (Figure 10C -- generates output XYZ (provided as a "reset" input to Forward/Backward flip-flop 704 (Figure 10C)). This insures that the flip-flop 704 produces output FWD, corresponding to forward operation of the chair. Additionally, NAND gate 754 performs an OR operation between XYZ and the further input (STRSW . HOLD) -- provided by NAND gate 756 -- to produce output GOB, the latter being provided as a clock input to "turn on" Go flip-flop 758. Generation of output GOB also turns on the Run flip-flop 700 (Figure 10C).
As the chair 8 (Figure 2) begins to rotate, the number of rotations are counted by the arrangement of Figure 10B, and -- when a prescribed number of rotations is counted -- the output MATCH is issued by comparator 654 (Figure 10B), as previously described. At that juncture, NAND gate 762 -- which performs an AND operation -- detects the presence of inputs FWD, GO and MATCH, and flip-flop 764 is set. Accordingly, flip-flop device 766 is set by device 764 upon the occasion of the next POSCLK pulse.
More specifically, referring to Figure 10D(2) -- which is a timing diagram -- pulse POSCLK is the primary clock pulse, based on which the number of rotations of the chair is counted. It is to be noted that, in the preferred embodiment, the chair rotates through a one-quarter turn before reception of the first POSCLK pulse. In Figure 10D(2), it is presumed that the number of rotations is preset for three. Upon the completion of two and one-quarter turns -- that is, the beginning of the third full turn -- the comparator output MATCH occurs, and flip-flop 766 is set with the reception of the next POSCLK pulse. Referring to both Figures 10D(1) and 10D(2), the Q output of flip-flop 766 enables one-shot device 768 so as to produce a
Figure imgf000078_0007
output on the trailing edge of POSCLK for a prescribed period of time (preferably, 0.1 seconds), this output being defined as signal
Figure imgf000078_0006
The latter is a negative pulse applied to Forward/Backward flip-flop 704 (Figure 10C) to reset the flip-flop 704, resulting in FWD going "low," further resulting in rotation in the backward direction of the chair 8 (Figure 2).
As best seen in the timing diagram of Figure 10D(2), the positive going edge of pulse
Figure imgf000078_0005
clocks flip-flop 770 to the "on" condition, resulting in generation of output
Figure imgf000078_0004
Correspondingly, output GOC goes "low," and this results -- via NAND gate 772 and inverter 774 -- in the setting of flip-flop 776 (see waveform NEARRST in Figure 10D(2)). Output NEARRST indicates the "backward" mode of operation of the chair 8 (Figure 2). Thus, with reference to Figure 10D(2), when the chair has rotated through three and a fraction turns, it stops, the motor reverses, and reverse rotation begins. Accordingly, the next time that the counter 662 (Figure 10B) assumes a value of three (the prescribed value of rotations), the output MATCH is issued, but this time the output FWD is "low," and the NAND gate 762 accordingly produces a "low" output.
It is to be noted that flip-flop 766 has its reset input connected to a series connection of NAND gate 778 and inverter 780, NAND gate 778 performing an OR operation between input
Figure imgf000078_0002
and input
Figure imgf000078_0003
By virtue of this arrangement, flip-flop 766 is reset under either of two conditions: (1) generation of the negative pulse
Figure imgf000078_0001
; or (2) occurrence of the reset input
Figure imgf000079_0001
Up/Down flip-flop 782 is set by the
Figure imgf000079_0002
output of flip-flop 766 when flip-flop 766 first goes "on," issuing the output DOWN, indicating the down-count mode of operation of the counter 662 (Figure 10B).
Referring to Figures 10A and 10B, when counter 662 arrives at a zero count, decoder 664 issues output
Figure imgf000079_0003
Furthermore, NAND gate 626 (Figure 10A) performs an AND operation with respect to inputs ZERO and NEARRST, and as a result of the OR operation of NAND GATE 608, the output RST is issued by the arrangement of Figure 10A. See the timing diagram of Figure 10D(2). As previously explained, with reference to Figure 10A, this output RST lasts for 0.1 seconds as a result of the operation of one-shot 616, which deactivates NAND gate 608 after that time period.
Upoil occurrence of RST, flip-flop 776 (Figure 10D(1)) is reset, and the output NEARRST goes "low." Thus, termination of the "backward" mode of operation of the rotatable chair 8 (Figure 2), is indicated. It is to be noted that, as a result of signal
Figure imgf000079_0004
going "low," during reversal of the rotation of the chair 8 (Figure 2), an "automatic stop" operation can be achieved. Specifically, referring to Figure 10D(1), when Automatic Stop switch 784 is closed,
Figure imgf000079_0005
is produced -- via NAND gate 786 and inverter 788 -- whenever
Figure imgf000079_0007
goes "low." The output
Figure imgf000079_0006
turns off the Run flip-flop 700, and sets a Hold flip-flop 790. The output HOLD is AND'ed with BLINK in NAND gate 792, resulting in
Figure imgf000079_0008
the latter being provided -- as previously discussed -- to NAND gate 714 in Figure 10C, for the purpose of generating the CHRDYON (Chair Ready On) indicator. In addition, the HOLD output is provided to NAND gate 756, the other input of which receives the "set" output of flip-flop 750, the latter being set by actuation of the start switch (reception of signal STRSW). Thus, actuation of the start switch results in reverse rotation of the chair 8 (Figure 2). Besides being stopped automatically, the chair 8 can, of course, be stopped manually, by actuation of the Stop switch, generating signal STOPSW. The latter signal is a "set" input to flip-flop 794, resulting in generation of output
Figure imgf000080_0004
The latter output turns off the Run flip-flop 700, resulting in stopping of rotation of the chair.
Finally, manual restart of the chair 8, for the purpose of reverse rotation, as previously discussed, turns on the Run flip-flop 700, and -- shortly thereafter -- the Hold flip-flop 790 (previously set as a result of automatic stopping via
Figure imgf000080_0003
) is now reset via
Figure imgf000080_0002
input thereto.
Referring now to Figure 10E, portion L2" receives input MTRSWON from circuit 462 as a result of the actuation of switch S2 in the operator control section 450 (Figure 9A), and receives input RELBRK from circuit 532 (Figure 9E). In order for the brake associated with the chair 8 (Figure 1) to be released, it is necessary that both MTRSWON and RELBRK be "high" -- this will cause the output of inverter 802 to be "high," which will turn on transistor Q1, and accordingly turn off transistor Q2. As a result,
Figure imgf000080_0001
will be "high," and the dynamic braking relay 322 (Figure 7A) will be released (deactivated). However, when either MTRSWN or RELBRK go "low," the output of NAND gate 800 will go "high, " the output of inverter 802 will go "low," transistor Q1 will be turned off, and transistor Q2 will be turned on. As a result,
Figure imgf000081_0002
will go "low," thus activating the dynamic braking relay circuit 322 (Figure 7A).
Logic portion L2" (Figure 10E) also has a manual brake on/off switch 804 which, in the downward position, manually allows the portion L2" to function as described above. Conversely, when switch 804 is in the upward position, brake application is removed from the chair 8 for manual positioning. In this case, test warning indicator DS10 in operator control section 450 (Figure 9A) comes on, as a result of
Figure imgf000081_0001
being "low" (connected to ground).
Figures 10F and 10G are detailed schematics of portions L3 and L3', respectively, of the logic section 62 of Figure 2. Referring first to Figure 10G, portion L3' receives inputs RUNIB (output of Run flip-flop 700 of Figure 10D(1)) and FWD (output of Forward/Backward flip-flop 704 of Figure 10D(1)). Switch SC of portion L3' is a push-button switch actuated by the operator in order to manually rotate the chair 8 (Figure 2). N ND gates 870 and 878 perform an AND operation with respect to the inputs thereto, and NAND gate 872 OR's the outputs of gates 870 and 878. Thus, NAND gate 872 issues an output under either of two conditions: (1) actuation of switch SC in the manual mode (MANMODE) of operation, or (2) receipt of Run flip-flop output RUNIB in the non-manual mode of operation.
NAND gates 880, 882 and 884 operate in a similar manner, so that NAND gate 882 issues an output under either of two conditions: (1) receipt of Forward/Backward flip-flop output FWD in the non-manual mode of operation, or (2) actuation of switch SD (to designate backward rotation) in the manual mode of operation. NAND gate 876 issues output
Figure imgf000082_0001
(provided to portion L3 of Figure 10F) provided that the following two conditions both exist: (1) running of the chair has been ordered either manually or automatically, and (2) either backward rotation of the chair has been manually designated, or forward rotation of the chair has been non-manually designated.
Finally, NAND gate 886 and inverter 884 combine to issue RUNBKD (provided to portion L3 of Figure 10F) under the following conditions: (1) running has been designated either manually or automatically, and (2) neither manual backward rotation nor automatic forward rotation have been designated.
Referring now to Figure 10F, basically, the input
Figure imgf000082_0002
will cause a current to flow into the negative input of op amp 822, but this current will not be applied instantaneously because of the RC time constant associated with resistor 830 and capacitor 832. The current into op amp 822 will cause a voltage output from op amp 822. This voltage output is, preferably, +5 volts, as adjusted by potentiometer Pf associated with op amp 822.
The input
Figure imgf000082_0003
(which is mutually exclusive from
Figure imgf000082_0004
as dictated by the logic of Figure 10G) will cause a different output of op amp 822. Again, as stated above, this voltage output of op amp 822 is preferably -5 volts.
Finally, the input
Figure imgf000082_0005
will cause the
Figure imgf000082_0006
output to be decreased in magnitude (preferably, from -5 volts to -2.5 volts).
Figure imgf000082_0007
will be "on" only during system reset (as dictated by previously described signal RST).
The above-described input signals processed by the portion L3 originate mainly in previously described portions L2, L2' and L2" of Figures 10C, 10D(1) and 10E, respectively. Portion L3 (Figure 10F) contains switches SA and SB which provide the capability of selecting manual operation of the chair motor 50 (Figure 2), for example, for the purpose of testing the system.
Inputs
Figure imgf000083_0006
and
Figure imgf000083_0007
are provided to optical coupler devices 810 and 824, respectively. When input
Figure imgf000083_0005
goes "low," current is caused to flow through resistor 812, turning off NPN transistor 814, resulting in application of a negative current via resistors 816 and 820 to op amp 822. As a result, op amp 822 provides a negative output.
Conversely, when
Figure imgf000083_0004
goes "low," optical coupler device 824 causes current to flow through resistor 826, turning off transistor 828, and resulting in a negative current input to the op amp 822. As a result, op amp 822 provides a positive (+15 volts) input. When input
Figure imgf000083_0003
goes "low" in the non-manual mode of operation of chair 8 (Figure 2), a "low" input is detected by optical coupler device 826. It is to be noted that non-manual operation is indicated by
Figure imgf000083_0002
going "high," as applied to NAND gate 829, the other input of which is provided with
Figure imgf000083_0001
inverted (to
RSLOW) by inverter 836. Optical coupler device 826, in response to detection of a "low" input, turns off PNP transistor 832, and a negative voltage is provided to the negative input of op amp 822. However, resistors 834 and 838 are twice the impedance value of corresponding resistors (discussed above) 816, 830 and 820, 834 (respectively). Accordingly, the input to op amp 822 is not as large a negative current, but half that. As a result, op amp 822 issues an output one-half the magnitude of the previously discussed outputs.
When switches SA and SB are in the "normal" position, the output of op amp 822 is provided -- via resistors 848 and 850 -- to output terminal MTRSPDl, this output (as will be recalled) being an analog input to circuit 456 (Figure 9C), the latter circuit producing further analog output MTRSPD which is a speed-indicating input to linear servo controller 320 (Figure 7A), and determines the speed of operation of the motor 50 which drives the chair 8. Accordingly, "low" inputs at
Figure imgf000084_0001
and
Figure imgf000084_0002
result in positive and negative voltage outputs MTRSPDl, corresponding to forward and reverse rotation of the chair at full speed. Moreover, a "low" input
Figure imgf000084_0003
results in a negative voltage output MTRSPDl, reduced by one-half in value, so as to result in reverse rotation at half speed.
Portion L3 includes switches SA and SB which are actuable to a "manual" position. In such position, output MTRSPDl is connected via potentiometer 852 to the output of op amp 822, with the result that manual adjustment of motor speed MTRSPDl can be accomplished. Moreover, when switch SB is moved to the "manual" position, output
Figure imgf000084_0004
goes "low" indicating the
"manual run" mode of operation, while output MANMODE goes "high," resulting in the same indication. In addition, output
Figure imgf000084_0005
(discussed previously with reference to Figure 10A) goes "low," so that the test warning display indicator DS10 (Figure 9A) will be caused to blink as a result of output TWLON (Figure 10A).
Finally, portion L3 is provided with a potentiometer 844 which is a zero-bias potentiometer, utilized to insure that the output of op amp 822 is zero volts when both
Figure imgf000085_0002
and
Figure imgf000085_0003
are "high" (that is, both RUNFWD and RUNBKWD are "off").
Figures 10H and 10I are detailed schematics of portions L4 and L4', respectively, of logic section 62 of Figure 2. The logic circuitry in portions L4 and L4' receive signals from the various switches on the operator control section 450 (Figure 9A), and as well from limit switches on the motors 68 and 74 (Figure 2) which raise and lower the flasher 70 and stripe cage
76, respectively. As a result of the reception of such signals, the logic circuitry in portions L4 and L4' generally produce signals that operate relays in relay panel 20 (Figures 2 and 8) previously discussed so as to raise and lower the flasher 70 and stripe cage 76, and to also rotate the stripe cage 76. Finally, logic portions L4 and L4' provide status output signals which indicate, to the processor 34 (Figure 2), the status of the two devices -- flasher 70 and stripe cage 76. Referring to portion L4 of Figure 10H, when
Figure imgf000085_0001
goes "high," flip-flop 900 is turned on. As a result, the Q output thereof is "low."
Limit switches 902 and 904 are "limit up" and "limit down" switches, respectively, associated with the optokinetic device 16. Specifically, referring to Figure 8, motor 74 -- which raises and lowers the stripe cage 76 -- includes, in the preferred embodiment, the switches 902 and 904 (Figure 10H) . Switches 902 and 904 are normally closed, but are selectively opened when the stripe cage 76 is raised by the motor 74 to its upper limit and lower limit, respectively.
Upon system initialization, the stripe cage 76 will normally be in its uppermost position, such that switch 902 will be open and switch 904 will be closed. Moreover, resetting of the system
Figure imgf000086_0001
in combination with upper limit switch 902 being open (LIMUPOF) and operator actuation of switch S8 (to lower the stripe cage --
Figure imgf000086_0002
) , results in operation of Up flip-flop 906 and Down flip-flop 908 via NAND gate 910 to turn the motor on (
Figure imgf000086_0003
goes "low") and to designate lowering of the stripe cage 76 (via
Figure imgf000086_0004
going "low"). Turn-on of the motor 74 and lowering of the stripe cage 76 is effected by signals
Figure imgf000086_0005
and
Figure imgf000086_0008
respectively, in the manner previously described with reference to Figure 8.
When the lower limit of the stripe cage 78 is reached, switch 904 opens, and the "stripes ready"
Figure imgf000086_0009
condition is indicated via NAND gate 912, inverter 914 and NPN transistor 916, provided that switch S11 (in operator control section 450 of Figure 9A) has been actuated to energize the stripe cage light 400 and stripe gate rotation motor 74' (Figure 8). NAND gate 912 issues output LITEON via inverter 918 and TRNCG via inverter 920, provided to circuits 532 and 533 (Figure 9E), respectively, so as to provide further outputs
Figure imgf000086_0006
and +CCMTR/-CGMTR to relay panel 20 and motor 74' (Figure 8) It will be recalled that, with reference to Figure 8,
Figure imgf000086_0007
going "low" results in application of power to stripe cage light 400, while inputs -CGMTR and +CGMTR to motor 74' result in forward and reverse rotation, respectively, of the stripe cage 76 under the influence of motor 74'. The direction of rotation of the stripe motor 76 (Figure 8) is designated by switch S14 in operator control section 450 (Figure 9A) . This results in selective generation of inputs
Figure imgf000086_0010
and
Figure imgf000086_0011
to NAND gates 922 and 924 which -- via inverters 926 and 928 -- provide outputs DATIN13 and DATIN14 to the computer processor 34 (Figure 2). DATIN13 indicates the "stripes right" condition of rotation, while DATIN14 indicates the "stripes on" condition. Finally, previously mentioned signal LITEON -- commanding turn on of the stripe cage light 400 (Figure 8) -- is inhibited when raising of the stripe cage is commanded by actuation of switch S7 via Up
Figure imgf000087_0001
flip-flop 906, NAND gate 912 and inverter 918. In a similar manner, output TRNCG (the turn cage command) is also inhibited via NAND gate 912 and inverter 920.
Referring to Figure 101, portion L4' includes a flip-flop 950 which is set by turn-on of the system power, at which time the Q output of flip-flop 950 is provided via NAND gates 952 and 954 to one-shot 956, which generates a short (preferably, 0.15 seconds) pulse Q. It is to be noted that NAND gate 952 performs an OR operation with respect to the inputs thereto, while NAND gate 954 permits the output of NAND gate 952 to be blocked by
Figure imgf000087_0002
and LIMDNOF (the latter two signals being received from portion L4 of Figure 10H).
The Q output of one-shot 956 results in generation,' by NAND gate 958, of the output FLMTRON (Flasher Motor On), the latter comprising a "high" input to circuit 532 (Figure 9E), generating a low output which causes application of power to
Figure imgf000087_0003
the flasher motor 68 (Figure 8). In addition, the Q output of one-shot 956 resets the flip-flop 950.
Portion L4' also receives an input UPFLSW (as a result of operator actuation of switch S9 in operator control section 450 of Figure 9A for the purpose of raising the flasher). Input UPFLSW sets flip-flop 960, and the "set" output thereof is provided via NAND gates
952 and 954 (so long as it is not blocked by
Figure imgf000087_0004
and LIMDNOF provided to NAND gate 954). As a result, operator actuation of the "flasher up" switch S9 (Figure 9A) results in automatic turn-on of the flasher motor (FLMTRON) . In a similar manner, operator actuation of
"flasher down" switch S8 in operator control section 450 results in setting of flip-flop 962 via DWNFLSW, and the set output thereof is provided -- via NAND gates 964 and 958 -- to produce FLMTRON (again, presuming that NAND gate 964 is not inhibited by
Figure imgf000088_0003
and LIMDNOF).
Figure 10J is a detailed schematic of portion L5 of logic section 62 of Figure 2. Portion L5 generates SYNCIN and 5MSSAMP which -- via photostimulator 72 (Figure 2) -- operate the flasher 70, such operation being conducted under the control of computer processor 34 via EOG interface 30 and portion L5. In general, portion L5 actuates photostimulator 72 to send a trigger pulse to the flasher 70 to produce a single flash on command. Furthermore, the CEOG system can, again via photostimulator 72, arrange for stimulation of the subject 2 -- and thus, transmission of electrode test data to the computer processor 34 -- once during any given time interval (for example, 2.5 milliseconds, 5 milliseconds, etc.).
Referring to Figure 10J, portion L5 includes flip-flops 970 and 972 which are reset by a power-on initialization input or a computer initilization
Figure imgf000088_0001
input ( , provided to flip-flops 970 and 972
Figure imgf000088_0002
via NAND gate 974 and inverter 976.
The Q output of flip-flop 970 actuates one-shot device 978 and series-connected one-shot device 980 to generate short (preferably, 10 microseconds) pulses separated by a longer (preferably, 5 milliseconds) time duration, such output being designated 5MSSAMP. The latter comprises an "initiate sample" pulse provided to circuit 250 of Figure 6D, wherein it is utilized to provide the output SAMPLE (used for ADC in Figure 6A). Flip-flop 972 -- via its
Figure imgf000089_0001
output -- actuates solenoid/ switch combination 982 to cause closing of the switch so as to provide a variable (by virtue of potentiometers 984 and 986) time control to the one-shot device 980. As a result, one-shot 980 can be adjusted to provide "initiate sample" pulses of less than 5 milliseconds (preferably, 2.5 milliseconds) duration.
It is to be noted that one-shot 978 is triggered by the falling edge of the pulse output from the output of flip-flop 970. This falling edge is
Figure imgf000089_0002
generated by flip-flop 970 in response to the D input, DOUT13 -- comprising a "Go bit" input from the computer processor 34 (Figure 2). DOUT13 designates a desired stream of pulses which will occur typically at 5 millisecond intervals. Similarly, processor 34 provides input DOUT11 to the D input of flip-flop 972, and this results (as previously explained) in adjustment of one-shot 980 so as to provide a 2.5 millisecond "initiate sample" pulse separation. It is to be noted that flip-flops 970 and 972 are clocked (at the C inputs) by computer-generated strobe input provided via inverter 988. is, as
Figure imgf000089_0004
Figure imgf000089_0003
will be seen below, decoded in interface 30 of Figure 2 (see discussion of Figure 11D below). Further referring to portion L5 of Figure 10J, processor 34 (Figure 2) generates a flash bit DOUT12, provided to the D input of flip-flop 990, the latter being clocked by computer-generated strobe The
Figure imgf000089_0005
Q output of flip-flop 990 triggers one-shot 992 which generates -- via inverter 994 -- a square wave pulse of short duration (preferably, 15 microseconds). The latter pulse is provided as an emitter input to transistor 996, the collector output of which generates flasher sync plus SYNCIN. SYNCIN is a pulse, preferably having a 25-volt "swing," and is provided to photostimulator 72 so as to synchronize the flashing light produced thereby.
Flip-flop 990 is reset either by operator-initiated reset or by the output of
Figure imgf000090_0002
Figure imgf000090_0001
one-shot 992, provided via NAND gate 998 and inverter 999.
Figure 10K is a detailed schematic diagram of the portion L8 of logic section 62 of Figure 2. Portion L8 uses feedback from the X mirror signal (XBACK) to generate a signal (YFIX) that is sent to the Y mirror 14 (Figure 2) -- specifically, to the Y-deflection circuitry of mirrors 14 -- to correct for the curvature of the light spot (laser spot) on the cylindrical walls 18 (Figure 1) of the test station 4. This curvature results from the fact that the laser 12 is located above the head of the subject 2, and is accordingly aimed downwardly on the cylindrical walls 18.
Referring to Figure 10K, portion L8 receives input XBACK, an analog signal provided by mirrors 14.
Isolation op amp (voltage follower) 1000 -- in response to the positive input XBACK and the negative bias/gain-adjusted input (bias and gain are adjusted via potentiometers 1002 and 1004, respectively) -- provides its output to both positive inputs of a multiplier 1006. Multiplier 1006 squares the output of amplifier 1000, and provides the result -- via isolation op amp (voltage follower) 1008 -- as output YFIX. The latter output YFIX is provided to portion L10 (Figure 10M) to be discussed below.
As a result of the operation of portion L8, correction or compensation for the vertical angle existing between the line-of-sight from the light source (laser) 12 and the cylindrical wall 18 (Figure 1) and the line-of-sight between the eyes of the subject 2 and the cylindrical walls 18 is achieved.
Figure 10L is a detailed schematic diagram of the portion L9 of logic section 62 of Figure 2. Generally, portion L9 receives and stores four bits from a Move X register (to be subsequently explained), the four bits being designated:
DOUT10 (GO X bit) -- a bit which causes scanning of the mirror in the X direction in accordance with circuitry contained in portion L10 (Figure 10M) to be discussed below.
DOUT11 (CMPSINE) -- a bit which causes scanning of the mirror in the X direction using bits 0 through 9 of the MOVX register (to be discussed below), the deflection ranging from -30° to +30° in 1024 increments thereof.
DOUT12 (CMPSHTR) -- a bit which causes opening of the shutter 66 (Figure 2). DOUT13 (YSCAN) -- a bit which causes scanning of the mirror in the Y direction in accordance with a signal from the portion L10 (Figure 10M) to be discussed below.
It is to be noted that -- as previously discussed -- the inputs DOUT10-DOUT13 are strobed into respective flip-flops 1020-1023 by STRBMX via NAND gate 1024 and inverter 1025.
The
Figure imgf000091_0001
output of flip-flop 1020 forms the output XSINE via NAND gate 1026. NAND gate 1026 has its other input connected to switch S13 (in operator control section 450 of Figure 9A), such that actuation of the auto/setup switch S13 to the "setup" position (or DOUT10) will generate XSINE.
Figure imgf000092_0001
the output of inverter 1028, is OR'ed with the Q output of flip-flop 1022 in NAND gate 1032 to provide -- via transistor 1036 -- output is
Figure imgf000092_0002
Figure imgf000092_0003
utilized to open/close the shutter 66 associated with the mirrors 14 (Figure 2). Furthermore, XSINE from inverter 1028 is AND'ed with the Q output of flip-flop 1021 in NAND gate 1030 and inverter 1034 to provide output CMPSINE.
The respective outputs of inverter 1028 and NAND gate 1030 are OR'ed in NAND gate 1038, the latter providing a base-controlling input to transistor 1040. Transistor 1040 provides a collector output
Figure imgf000092_0007
the latter indicating operation of the laser 12 associated with the mirrors 14 and shutter 66 (Figure 2). It is to be noted that the Q output of flip-flop 1023 is provided via inverter 1042 in a wire-OR'ed connection to the base of transistor 1040. Thus, the presence of D0UT13 (YSCAN) -- input to flip-flop 1023 -- also actuates the scan light.
Input signal
Figure imgf000092_0004
-- provided via NAND gate 1044 and inverter 1046 whenever the computer is turned on or off -- resets flip-flops 1020-1023. Input RST -- generated whenever occurs, the operator resets the
Figure imgf000092_0005
system, or the chair goes into "reset" mode -- also functions to reset flip-flops 1020-1023 via inverters 1046 and 1048 and NAND gate 1044.
Portion L9 also includes flip-flop 1050 which is reset by initialization inpu (which occurs for
Figure imgf000092_0006
one second after the power to the system is turned on) . Flip-flop 1050 is set by inputs WRTONLY (indicating that the computer wants to write data to one of its register addresses) and
Figure imgf000093_0002
(a strobe for loading data into the MOVY register, to be discussed below). These inputs are provided via inverter 1052 and NAND gate 1054. The Q output of flip-flop 1050 is output (to be discussed further below with respect to
Figure imgf000093_0001
Figure 10M).
Figures 10M and 10N are detailed schematic diagrams of portions L10 and L10', respectively, of logic section 62 of Figure 2. Portions L10 and L10' are responsible for performing various analog switching functions which enable the driving of the mirrors 14 (Figure 2) in the X direction to be accomplished either under computer control or under local control. Furthermore, portions L10 and L10' are responsible for the performance of various summing and analog switching functions to accomplish the following:
(1) Control of the driving of mirrors 14 (Figure 2) in the Y direction by both adjustment knob P3 (in operator control section 450 of Figure
9A) and computer processor 34 (Figure 2), the latter being accomplished via a Move Y register (as will be subsequently explained).
(2) Adjustment of the Y-direction scanning of the mirrors 14 in accordance with correction signals generated by portion L8 (Figure 10K), so as to correct for curvature of the laser spot on the cylinder walls 18 (Figure 1), as previously described above. (3) Origination of driving signals for
Y-direction scanning of the mirrors 14 by the generating circuitry in portion L11 of Figure 100, as will be subsequently discussed), the latter generating the driving signals for X-direction scanning as well. In addition to the above, portion L100' contains two buffer amplifiers provided for the purpose of feeding back the signal from the mirrors 14 (Figure 2) so that the computer processor 34 can read and display the positions of the X mirror and Y mirror relative to the corresponding Position X and Position Y registers (discussed in more detail below). Referring to Figure 10M, portion LIO receives SIGOUT -- an analog signal produced by portion L11 (Figure 100 -- to be discussed below); this analog signal defines a desired pattern of scanning to be performed by the laser 12/mirrors 14 (Figure 2). In addition, portion L10 receives output XSINE -- generated by portion L9 of Figure 10L, previously discussed -- the latter forming an enabling input permitting gate 1100 (preferably, a field-effect transistor analog switch) to pass SIGOUT through to the negative input of summing amplifier 1102, the positive input of which is connected to ground. As a result, summing amplifier 1102 produces mirror-driving output signal XDRIVE.
Portion L10 receives input MOVX (bits 0-9 of the MOVX register to be discussed below), and -- in a similar manner -- input MOVX is gated to the negative input of summing amplifier 1102 via gate 1104 enabled by input CMPSINE (generated by portion L9 of Figure 10L previously discussed). Proper biasing of the negative input of summing amplifier 1102 is provided by biasing circuitry 1106.
Thus, in accordance with which input, XSINE or CMPSINE, is received by portion L10, either SIGOUT (the pattern generated by portion L11 of Figure 100) or MOVX (the computer-generated pattern) is gated through summing amplifier 1102 to form mirror-driving output XDRIVE. Output XDRIVE is an analog input to the X-driver card (not shown), which is a conventional hardware element supplied with the mirrors 14 (Figure 2).
Further referring to portion L10, initialization of the system
Figure imgf000095_0002
results in generation of
Figure imgf000095_0001
the latter being provided via amplifier 1112 as an enabling input to the switch 1114. As a result, biasing voltage provided by biasing circuitry 1116 is gated through switch 1114 to the negative input of further summing amplifier 1118.
In response to input YSCAN (designating desired Y-direction scanning in accordance with the pattern SIGOUT), switch 1108 gates SIGOUT through to the negative input of amplifier 1118. As a result, amplifier 1118 generates YDRIVE (the Y-direction driving signal for the mirrors 14 of Figure 2 ) in accordance with either SIGOUT (the pattern generated by portion L11 of Figure 100) or MOVY (the computer-generated pattern) . The inverse of YSCAN is provided by inverter 1120 as an enabling input to switch 1122, thus disabling a further input to the negative input of amplifier 1118 (and thus, the parabolic correction when using YSCAN) . Specifically, when switch SW is in the upward position, input YFIX is provided via resistor 1124 and potentiometer 1126, as well as gate 1122, to the negative input of summing amplifier 1118, thus providing a correction factor (as previously discussed) for the YDRIVE output driving the mirrors 14 of Figure 2.
Portion L10 includes circuitry 1130 and 1132 which supply voltages -Vss and +Vdd, respectively, and are as well used to supply voltages to potentiometer 504. Potentiometer 504 is associated with adjustment knob P4 in operator control section 450 (Figure 9A) which, as previously explained, is utilized to adjust the vertical position of the laser beam from light source 12. As a result of adjustment of potentiometer 504, the center tap thereof provides another summed input to the negative input of amplifier 1118, thus achieving necessary adjustment of the Y-direction mirror-driving output YDRIVE so as to achieve the desired vertical positioning of the light beam.
Referring to Figure 10N, the portion L10' basically comprises an op amp (voltage-following) 1150 which receives feedback signal XBACK from the mirror driving circuitry in mirrors 14 (Figure 2), and appropriately amplifies same to obtain the analog output POSX. The analog output POSX is, as previously described, provided via converter stage 56 (Figure 2) -- that is, the ADC portion thereof -- so as to provide the computer processor 34 with a digital input representative of the mirror position. It is to be understood that portion L10' is identical to a circuit which performs the same function with respect to the feedback signal YBACK (Y-direction feedback signal from the mirrors 14) so as to generate the analog output POSY.
Figure 100 is a detailed schematic diagram of the portion L11 of logic section 62 of Figure 2. Basically, portion L11 includes a sine wave oscillator utilized in conjunction with establishment of a scanning pattern for the light beam generated by light source 12 in the case where manual function switch S12 (on operator control section 450 of Figure 9A) is set to call for scanning of the light source 12 in accordance with a sine wave pattern. As will be seen below, the frequency of the sine wave generated by the sine wave oscillator in portion L11 is controlled by various input signals corresponding to the scanning speed setting, as set by adjustment knob P3 on operator control section 450. Moreover, portion L11 of Figure 100 contains the necessary circuitry for choosing between the various scanning waveform patterns, as selected by manual function switch S12. Referring to Figure 100, device 1200 is a conventional device (preferably, an ICL8038 made by Intersil of Cupertino, California). It generates, at output terminal 2 thereof, a sine wave having characteristics as determined by an adjustable sine wave timing circuit 1202 provided at the Lin terminal of the device 1200. In addition, device 1200 provides (at terminal 9 thereof) a square wave output and (at terminal 3 thereof) a sawtooth output. As previously discussed with reference to Figure 9C, switch S12 is employed by the operator to designate the desired type of output. Switch S12 generates signals
Figure imgf000097_0001
and
Figure imgf000097_0002
(selectively), and these inputs are provided to corresponding relays K1l, K12 and K13, respectively (Figure 10L). As a result of selective actuation of switches K11, K12 or K13, the square wave, sawtooth or sine wave output of device 1200 is provided to the negative input of isolation amplifier 1204, the positive input of which is grounded. As a result, amplifier 1204 issues output SIGOUT. Proper biasing of the negative input of isolation amplifier 1204 is provided by biasing circuit 1206.
Device 1200 is provided, at terminal 8 thereof, with a frequency-controlling input OSREF originating in a potentiometer 496 connected in a voltage-divider arrangement with voltage-dividing resistors 498 and 500 (see Figure 9C). It will be recalled that signal OSREF is a frequency-controlling input resulting from operator actuation of adjustment knob P3 in operator control section 450 (Figure 9A), by which the operator adjusts the horizontal speed of scanning of mirrors 14. This effect is achieved by application of the input OSREF as a frequency-controlling input to the device 1200. Finally, reference voltage inputs +VREF and -VREF are provided to supply voltage input terminals VCC and VEE, respectively, of the device 1200, the latter terminals also being connected to respective supply voltage circuits 1200 and 1212.
Portion L11 is provided with ganged switches SN connected to the terminal 10 input of device 1200.
When switches SN are in the downward position, a normal frequency of operation of device 1200 results. However, when switches SN are actuated to the upward position, a high-frequency of operation of device 1200 results, and this is indicated by output signal
Figure imgf000098_0001
going "low."
Figures 11A through 11D and 11G are detailed logic block diagrams and circuit schematics of the interface 30 of the CEOG system of Figure 2. Figures 11E, 11F and 11H are timing diagrams of the write (data out) sequence, read (data in) sequence and interrupt sequence, respectively, relating to the operation of the interface 30 of the CEOG system of Figure 2.
Referring to Figure HA, three tristate buffers 1230, 1232 and 1234 are provided, each of which is responsive to input signal
Figure imgf000098_0003
Specifically, when goes "low," each of tristate buffers 1230, 1232
Figure imgf000098_0002
and 1234 is actuated so that a prewired address (for example, in the preferred embodiment, address 000,154) in the processor 34 (Figure 2) passes through the tristate buffers 1230, 1232 and 1234 to outputs DAT0-DAT15. The latter outputs are provided to the arrangement of Figure 11B, which will be discussed further below.
Conversely, when goes "high," tristate buffers 1230, 1232 and
Figure imgf000099_0001
1234 appear as an open circuit to output terminals DAT0-DAT15, and as a result data from DAT0-DAT9 (from processor 34 of Figure 2) is provided to the arrangement of Figure 11B. As a result of the "open circuit" condition of tristate buffers 1230, 1232 and 1234, outputs DAT10-DAT15 are not active.
Tristate buffers 1230, 1232 and 1234 are, in the preferred embodiment, SN74LS365 devices (manufactured by Texas Instruments).
Referring to Figure 11B, the arrangement therein comprises bus transceiver devices 1240-1243 and tristate buffers 1244 and 1245. Bus transceivers 1240-1243 receive and respond to input
Figure imgf000099_0003
Figure imgf000099_0002
Specifically, when goes "low," data DAT0-DAT15 passes through internal inverter 1246 (shown, for illustrative purposes, in device 1240 only) to terminals
Figure imgf000099_0004
(the latter terminals representing a common data bus to the computer processor 34 (Figure 2)), and data passes through inverter 1247
Figure imgf000099_0005
to output terminals DAL0-DAL15.
Conversely, when goes "high," data
Figure imgf000099_0006
DAT0-DAT15 does not pass through internal inverter 1246, but again data passes through inverter
Figure imgf000099_0007
1247 to output terminals DAL0-DAL15.
Output terminals DAL0-DAL11 are connected as inputs to tristate buffers 1244 and 1245, which are responsive to input
Figure imgf000099_0008
More specifically, when goes "low," inputs DAL0-DAL11 are passed through to outputs DTOA0-DTOA11, the latter (as will be recalled from above) providing inputs to the DAC circuitry in converter stage 56 (Figure 2). Conversely, when goes "high," tristate buffers 1244 and 1245 are open-circuited, thus precluding any output DTOA0-DTOA11.
To summarize the above, when
Figure imgf000100_0001
goes "low," data DAT0-DAT15 are written to the computer via the computer bus
Figure imgf000100_0002
. Conversely, when
Figure imgf000100_0003
goes
"high" and
Figure imgf000100_0004
goes "low," data is provided by the computer processor 34 (Figure 2) via the computer bus
Figure imgf000100_0005
, bus transceivers 1240-1243, tristate buffers 1244 and 1245, and output terminals DTOA0-DTOA11, to the DAC circuitry in converter stage 56 (Figure 2).
It is to be noted that -- in the preferred embodiment -- computer-generated control data (specifically,
Figure imgf000100_0006
and
Figure imgf000100_0007
are transmitted over the computer bus to further
Figure imgf000100_0008
bus transceiver devices (not shown) -- identical to bus transceivers 1240-1243 -- so as to produce at the output thereof corresponding control data DOUT, DIN, SYNC, WTBT, IAKI , BS7 and INIT. These control data are utilized in a manner to be described below.
Finally, bus transceivers 1240-1243 are, in the preferred embodiment, bus transceivers. Model No. DM8838 (manufactured by National Semiconductors). Moreover, tristate buffers 1244 and 1245 are, in the preferred embodiment, buffer devices SN74LS365 (manufactured by Texas Instruments).
Referring to Figure 11C, interface 30 (Figure 2) further comprises tristate buffer devices 1250-1253 and latch circuit 1254. In operation, device 1250 responds to
Figure imgf000101_0001
going "low," to pass data DAL8-DAL13 (the outputs of bus transceiver devices 1240 and 1241, respectively, of Figure 11B, just discussed above) to output terminals DOUT8-DOUT13. Thus, the latter outputs are derived
Figure imgf000101_0003
indirectly from the corresponding inputs (provided via the computer bus -- Figure 11B) to bus transceiver devices 1240 and 1241, and in particular are control bits 8-13 in a control word register (to be discussed below). Conversely, when input
Figure imgf000101_0002
is "high, " tristate buffer 1250 is open-circuited, and data does not pass therethrough.
Tristate buffer 1251 responds to
Figure imgf000101_0004
(a "Group 1" strobe) going "low," to connect outputs DAT10-DAT15 to ground, thus creating "low" (zero) output conditions at DAT10-DAT15. It is to be noted that
Figure imgf000101_0005
goes "low" whenever analog-to-digital converted data (from converter stage 56 to Figure 2 ) is to be entered in the processor 34. Referring back to Figure 6A, since converters A/D1-A/D5 provide 10 bits of data
(DAT0-DAT9), tristate buffer 1251 performs the necessary function of inserting leading zeros into the most significant six bit positions (DAT10-DAT15). Referring back to Figure 11B, it will be recalled that goes "low, " when data input to the computer is to be achieved. Accordingly, DAT0-DAT15 from tristate buffers 1250-1252 are passed through devices 1240-1243 to the computer bus
Figure imgf000101_0006
Further referring to Figure 11C, tristate buffer 1252 responds to
Figure imgf000101_0007
(a "status in" strobe) going "low," to pass data DATIN9-DATIN14, provided by logic section 62 (of Figures 2 and 10A-100), to outputs DAT9-DAT14. The latter is provided to the computer bus via devices 1240 and 1241 (Figure 11B), as previously
Figure imgf000102_0001
described. When
Figure imgf000102_0002
is "high," tristate buffer 1252 blocks transfer of data.
Latch circuit 1254 responds to STROB0 (a "control register" strobe) to strobe data DAL0-DAL4 (received from processor 34 of Figure 2 via the computer bus and devices 1242 and 1243 of Figure 11B) in latch circuit 1254. Tristate buffer 1253 responds to
Figure imgf000102_0003
(a "status register" strobe) going "low," to send data DAL0-DAL4 latched by device 1254 to outputs DAT0-DAT4, the latter being provided to the computer bus via devices 1242 and 1243 of Figure 11B. In addition, tristate buffer 1253 receives input DOSAMP (a "write busy" signal set in the logic whenever a write operation is to be performed), and provides DOSAMP to output DAT15 in response to
Figure imgf000102_0004
going "low." When
Figure imgf000102_0005
goes "high," tristate buffer 1253 blocks transfer of data therethrough.
Figure 11D illustrates the read/write decoding and control circuitry in interface 30 of Figure 2, and will now be explained in conjunction with timing diagrams Figures HE and 11F, respectively.
Referring to Figures 11D and 11E, inverters 1270-1273 receive inputs DAL12, DAL10, DAL9, DAL8 and DAL7, respectively, from the circuitry of Figure 11B. NAND gate 1274 receives inputs BS7, DAL15, DAL14, DAL13 and the outputs of inverters 1270-1273, and decodes these inputs so as to derive a logic one output whenever inputs (address line inputs) DAL7-10, DAL12-15 indicate a predetermined block of addresses in processor 34 (Figure 2). In this particular case, inputs DAL7-DAL10 and DAL12-DAL15 indicate address blocks 164, Oxx or 164, lxx. More specifically, DAL0-DAL17 are address inputs from the processor 34 of Figure 2, and -- when the various DAL bits have the values shown in Table 1 (below) -- corresponding address blocks are indicated.
Figure imgf000103_0002
When input BS7 is logic 1 ("on"), and when NAND gate 1274 decodes the desired address blocks, the computer has -- via its address inputs DAL0-DAL17 -- called for data for the desired addresses. Accordingly, the output of NAND gate 1274 sets flip-flop 1276 -- via inverter 1278 and AND gate 1280 -- provided that the WTBT input to AND gate 1280 is "high," indicating a write operation (that is, sending of data to the computer). Input SYNC (an address sync pulse) is applied to the clock input of flip-flop 1276, so as to strobe the output of AND gate 1280 into flip-flop 1276, resulting in RDYWRIT going "high." SYNC is further provided -- via inverter 1282 -- to
NAND gate 1284, the other input of which receives the decoder output of NAND gate 1274. Thus, so long as
Figure imgf000103_0001
is "low," or so long as the output of NAND gate 1274 is "high" (indicating that the desired address blcok has not been decoded as called by the computer), the flip-flop 1276 cannot be reset by NAND gate 1284. However, once either SYNC goes "high" or NAND gate 1274 goes "low," flip-flop 1276 is reset.
Whereas the above has described achievement of the "ready write" condition (flip-flop 1276 being designated the Ready Write flip-flop), the same basic operation takes place with respect to the Ready Read flip-flop 1286. When input BS7 is logic 1 ("on"), and when WTBT goes "low," indicating a "read" operation, and when a desired address block has been decoded by NAND gate 1274, Ready Read flip-flop 1286 is set via inverter 1288 and AND gate 1290. Flip-flop 1286 is strobed (via its C input) and reset (via its R input) in the same manner as described above with respect to flip-flop 1276.
The arrangement of Figure HD also includes latch circuit 1292 which receives computer-generated addresses DAL1-DAL6 from the arrangement of Figure 11B. Latch 1292 is strobed by NAND gate 1294 whenever either of flip-flops 1276 and 1286 are set. Referring to the timing diagram of Figure 11E, computer-generated address data DAL(N), N = 1-6, are provided via computer bus (Figure HB). WTBT (Figure 11E) goes
"high," indicating a write operation, enabling AND gate 1280 to set Ready Write flip-flop 1276 when the desired address block is decoded by NAND gate 1274. (This, preferably, occurs no more than 20 nanoseconds after WTBT going "high.") Once Ready Write flip-flop 1276 is set, NAND gate 1294 goes "high," preferably within a maximum of 14 nanoseconds after AND gate 1280 has gone "high." As indicated earlier, the "high" output of NAND gate 1294 strobes address data (from the processor 34 of Figure 2) into latch 1292.
Returning to Figure 11D, when flip-flop 1276 is set by AND gate 1280, and output RDYWRIT is issued, the latter output provides further outputs WRTONLY (via amplifier 1295) and
Figure imgf000105_0002
(via inverter 1296). Output RDYWRIT is also provided to NAND gate 1298, the other input of which receives signal DOUT, which goes "high" when the computer has begun putting out data (preferably, at least 25 nanoseconds after data output begins -- see the timing diagram of Figure 11E). NAND gate 1298 performs an AND operation with respect to inputs DOUT and RDYWRIT, and the output of NAND gate 1298 is provided -- via NAND gate 1300 (which performs an OR operation) -- to trigger one-shot device 1302. One-shot device 1302 issues a short (preferably, one microsecond) negative pulse, the trailing edge of which triggers flip-flop 1304.
The Q output of flip-flop 1304 is provided to NAND gate 1306, the other input of which receives the inverted (via inverter 1308) output of NAND gate 1298. NAND gate 1306 performs an AND operation with respect to the inputs thereto so as to issue a negative pulse, the leading edge of which triggers further one-shot device 1310. The output of NAND gate 1306 is designated and this output is provided as
Figure imgf000105_0001
one input to NAND gate 1312 which performs an OR operation with respect thereto. The output of NAND gate 1312 is provided, via inverter 1314, as a strobe input to decoder 1316 which, at its A-C inputs, receives address inputs ADDR4-ADDR6 from latch 1292. The further address outputs ADDR1-ADDR3 of latch 1292 are provided directly to a further decoder 1318 which is strobed (at its D input) by the Q0 output of decoder 1316.
In short, decoder 1316 -- as a result of the
ADDR4-ADDR6 inputs thereto and
Figure imgf000106_0001
-- creates groups of strobe signals
Figure imgf000106_0002
and Outputs are provided to
Figure imgf000106_0003
Figure imgf000106_0004
corresponding decoders 192, 194 and 196 (Figure 6C), wherein a decoding operation takes place so as to generate further appropriate strobe inputs STROBN for use in the DAC circuitry (Figure 6E) of converter stage 56 (Figure 2). Output
Figure imgf000106_0005
from decoder 1316 is provided to further decoder 1318, which also receives address inputs ADDR1-ADDR3 from latch 1292. As a result of its operation, decoder 1318 generates output
Figure imgf000106_0006
(via amplifier 1320), output STROBO (a "control word" strobe generated via inverters 1322 and 1324 and NAND gate 1326), and output (a "status word"
Figure imgf000106_0007
strobe).
To summarize, the circuitry of Figure 11D decodes the address line inputs DAL1-DAL6, and generates the various groups of strobe signals (GRPOSTB, GRP1STB, GRP2STB and GRP3STB) which are variously sent to the logic section 62 (Figures 2 and 6A-6E). These groups of strobe signals insure that the computer processor 34 (Figure 2) retrieves the proper data from, or stores the proper data in, proper address locations in memory, while properly timing the various transfer and analog-to-digital (or digital-to-analog) conversion functions. It will be recalled that the leading edge of the output of NAND gate 1306 triggered one-shot 1310. Subsequently, the trailing edge of the output of one-shot 1310 triggers (sets) flip-flop 1338. The Q output of flip-flop 1338 is accordingly a negative pulse which -- via NAND gate 1340 and inverter 1342 -- causes output
Figure imgf000107_0001
to go "low," the latter being provided to the computer processor 34 (Figure 2) via the computer bus. NAND gate 1340 also receives
Figure imgf000107_0002
-- generated by the circuitry of Figure 11G during device (i.e., CEOG system) interrupt of the computer -- and performs an OR operation so that
Figure imgf000107_0003
goes "low" either upon the occurrence of the Q negative pulse output of flip-flop 1338 or upon
Figure imgf000107_0004
going "low." Finally, after some unknown time has passed (thus, amounting to asynchronous operation), input DOUT (received via the computer bus, as explained above in discussion of Figure 11B) goes "low" (see the timing diagram of Figure 11E), so that the output of NAND gate 1300 goes "low." This "low" signal passes through NAND gate 1356 (acting as an OR gate) and inverter 1358 to reset flip-flops 1304 and 1338, resulting in output going "high" (or RPLY going "low") -- see the
Figure imgf000107_0005
timing diagram of Figure 11E. Shortly thereafter, signal SYNC also goes "low," and the write (data out) sequence is completed.
Further referring to the timing diagram of Figure 11E, in the preferred embodiment, the time lapses shown therein are preferably as follows. Time lapse T1A is preferably 75 nanoseconds at the minimum; T1B is preferablly 66 nanoseconds maximum (including a 20 nanosecond set-up time); T2A is preferably 25 nanoseconds minimum; T3A is preferably 14 nanoseconds maximum; T4A is preferably 25 nanoseconds minimum; T5A is preferably 190 nanoseconds minimum; T5B is preferably 220 nanoseconds minimum; and T6 is preferably 120 nanoseconds maximum (typically, 60 nanoseconds). The above preferred time durations are based on the particular hardware utilized in the preferred embodiment of the CEOG system, as discussed above with respect to Figures 11A-11D.
Referring to the timing diagram of Figure 11F, a read (data input to the computer) operation takes place as follows. The computer generates address inputs DAL(N), which inputs are provided to latch 1292 of Figure 11D. The computer processor 34 (Figure 2) further generates SYNC which is provided as a strobe input to flip-flop 1286 (the Ready Read flip-flop). This strope (SYNC) sets flip-flop 1286 if its D input is a logic one on the leading edge of SYNC.
So long as WTBT is "low," indicating a read operation, AND gate 1290 provides a logic one at the D input of flip-flop 1286 in response to detection of the desired address block (so long as BS7 is logic 1
("on")), as decoded by NAND gate 1274 in conjunction with inverter 1278. NAND gate 1344 performs an AND operation with respect to inputs RDYREAD (from flip-flop 1286) and DIN (indicating that the computer is ready to receive input data) so as to generate
Figure imgf000108_0001
DIN is provided to NAND gate 1344 via an RC (delay) network -- resistor 1346 and capacitor 1348 -- so as to insure a necessary time delay (preferably 60 nanoseconds) between the occurrence of SYNC and the leading edge of DIN.
Figure imgf000108_0002
going "low" strobes decoder 1316 (via NAND gate 1312 and inverter 1314) so as to decode the inputs ADDR6-ADDR4 provided by latch 1292. Decoders 1316 and 1318 function as previously described above to generate the groups of strobe signals
Figure imgf000108_0005
Figure imgf000108_0003
and STROBO,
Figure imgf000108_0004
The signals generated by STROBEREAD each gate a particular set of data (e.g., STROB10 will gate data from channel 1 in the A/D section of Figure 6A) onto the data lines DAT0-DAT9. At the same time, lines DAT10-DAT15 will be zeroed by as shown in Figure 11C.
Figure imgf000109_0001
Furthermore,
Figure imgf000109_0002
going "low" causes one-shot 1302 to be triggered. After 1 microsecond, the trailing edge of the signal from one-shot 1302 sets flip-flop 1304. The output from flip-flop 1304 is AND'ed with STROBEREAD in NAND gate 1350 to produce the signal that sets flip-flop 1338 via its S input.
Figure imgf000109_0003
goes "low" in response to setting of flip-flop 1338, the latter acting via its Q output, NAND gate 1340 and inverter 1342.
In the meantime,
Figure imgf000109_0004
generates
Figure imgf000109_0005
via inverters 1352 and 1354. Inverter 1354 is an open-collector device, which is to say that its output may be connected to other open-collector outputs which also generate (as seen later). It will be recalled that
Figure imgf000109_0006
was used (in Figure 11B) to put data DAT0-DAT15 on the bus lines
Figure imgf000109_0007
Once DIN goes "low," STROBEREAD goes "low" (via the operation of NAND gate 1344 and inverter 1352). The reset (R) terminal of flip-flop 1338 will be accordingly enabled by NAND gates 1300 and 1356 (the latter of which performs an OR operation with respect to input
Figure imgf000109_0008
) and inverter 1358. Thus, flip-flop 1338 will be reset, causing
Figure imgf000109_0009
to go "high" via the operation of NAND gate 1340 and inverter 1342. Subsequently, the computer will cause SYNC to go "low, " and the read (data in) sequence will be completed.
Further referring to the timing diagram of Figure 11F, time durations disclosed therein are, in the preferred embodiment, as follows. Time duration T1F is preferably 54 nanoseconds maximum (in order to preclude a previous code (and thus, an erroneous code) from remaining in decoder 1316 of Figure 11B for too long a time duration); T2F is preferably 60 nanoseconds; T3F is preferably 83 nanoseconds; and T4F is preferably one microsecond. Again, the above-stated time durations are preferable based on the previously described circuitry of Figures 11A-11D.
Interface 30 of Figure 2 -- and the interrupt request procedure -- will not be further described with reference to the logic block diagrams/circuit schematics of Figure 11G and the timing diagram of Figure 11H. Input
Figure imgf000110_0001
is received by and sets flip-flop 1400 (the Data Ready flip-flop), while input DAL15 (the most significant bit from a control register to be described below) is received by and sets flip-flop 1402 (the Interrupt Enable flip-flop). The Q outputs of flip-flops 1400 and 1402 are provided to NAND gate 1404 (which performs an AND operation), and the output thereof is provided -- via inverter 1406 -- as a clock input to set flip-flop 1408. The Q output of flip-flop 1408 is provided via inverter 1410 as output
Figure imgf000110_0002
(see IRQ of the timing diagram of Figure 11H) . It is to be noted that flip-flop 1402 is clocked by STROBO generated by the circuitry of Figure 11D.
Figure imgf000110_0007
is transmitted to the processor 34 as an "interrupt computer" command. The circuitry of Figure 11G receives input IAKIN which (as mentioned above) is generated by a bus transceiver device similar to devices 1240-1243 of
Figure 11B in response to computer-generated input
Figure imgf000110_0003
received over the computer bus. Thus, further referring to Figures 11G and 11H, when both IAKIN and the output of inverter 1406 are "high, " the output of NAND gate 1412
Figure imgf000110_0004
goes "low." Output
Figure imgf000110_0005
is provided, via inverter 1414 and RC delay network 1416, to inverter 1418, the output of which is
Figure imgf000110_0006
Accordingly,
Figure imgf000111_0001
goes "low" in response to GATVEC going "low." Moreover,
Figure imgf000111_0002
going "low" causes
Figure imgf000111_0003
(the output of inverter 1420, the input of which is connected to inverter 1414) to also go "low." Finally, it is to be noted that flip-flop 1408 is reset in response to either
Figure imgf000111_0004
going "low" or going
Figure imgf000111_0005
"low," such being accomplished via NAND gate 1409 and inverter 1411.
Referring back to Figure 11D, it will be recalled that
Figure imgf000111_0012
is OR'ed with the output of flip-flop 1338 in NAND gate 1340, with the result that the output
Figure imgf000111_0006
goes "low" either in response to operator interrupt of the computer
Figure imgf000111_0007
, or in response to DIN or DOUT in a Computer Read or Computer Write operation Moreover, it will be further recalled that the output
Figure imgf000111_0008
-- in its "low" condition -- provides an enabling input for bus transceivers 1240-1243, allowing the transceivers 1240-1243 to pass data DAT15, DAT14, ... through to the computer bus .
Figure imgf000111_0009
Returning to Figure 11G, when IAKIN (an input from the computer via a bus transceiver device (not shown) -- see the discussion of Figure 11B above -- goes "low" in response to RPLY2, output
Figure imgf000111_0010
of NAND gate 1412 goes "high," resulting in GATVEC going "low" (see Figure 11H). Accordingly, outputs DGATE and RPLY2 also go "low." In addition, IAKIN is passed along to other devices on the computer bus by
Figure imgf000111_0011
, which is generated by NAND gate 1422 in response to IAKIN when the CEOG system is not requesting an interrupt. Resetting of the circuitry of Figure 11G is accomplished in response to either of three conditions: operation of a manual switch SWA (preferably, physically located in the interface 30) so as to reset the no-bounce switch 1424, resulting in generation of output
Figure imgf000112_0001
via NAND gate 1426 (which performs an OR operation) and inverter 1428; INIT going "high," as provided via inverter 1430 to NAND gate 1426; or turn-on of the system, activating a one second timer 1432 which provides an output via inverter 1434 to the NAND gate 1426 and inverter 1428. In the preferred embodiment, input
Figure imgf000112_0002
is connected, via an amplifier 1427 and a wired-OR connection, to one input of NAND gate 1426 so as to cause to go "low" in response
Figure imgf000112_0003
to
Figure imgf000112_0004
going "low," thus achieving reset of the. circuitry of Figure 11G in response to resetting of the ADC circuitry in converter stage 56 (Figure 2).
Returning to consideration of inverter 1430, which receives the input INIT, the output of inverter 1430 is connected to the input of amplifier 1436, the output of which produces (previously discussed above).
Figure imgf000112_0005
The circuitry of Figure 11G further comprises a flip-flop 1437 which is clocked by input STROBO, and set by input DAL14 -- the fourteenth bit of a control word register (to be discussed below) in computer processor 34 of Figure 2. As a result of being set, flip-flop 1437 generates a "low" output
Figure imgf000112_0006
which is bit 15 in a status word register (also to be discussed below) . Correspondingly, output
Figure imgf000112_0009
from inverter 1438 goes "high." Finally, in response to reset via or -- as provided to NAND gate
Figure imgf000112_0007
Figure imgf000112_0008
1440 - flip-flop 1437 is reset via inverter 1442, with the result that
Figure imgf000112_0011
goes "high, " while
Figure imgf000112_0010
goes "low. " The computer processor 34 of Figure 2 will now be described. It will be recalled that the processor 34 operates in conjunction with computer programs (software) 36, display device 38, hard-copy printer 40, floppy disk 42, and keyboard (for user control) 44. Whereas any general-purpose digital computer having at least the aforementioned elements/capabilities can be utilized, the preferred embodiment of this invention includes a PDP 11/03 central processing unit as processor 34, a UT-52 terminal as display 38/keyboard 44, an RXV-11 disk unit as floppy disk 42, and the RT-11 software package as computer programs 36 (the latter being readily available from Digital Equipment Corporation). In addition, the circuitry of Figures 11A-11G constitutes an addition to the memory locations of the computer. A summary of the additions is shown in Table 2 (below).
The control word register (mentioned in Table 2 ) is a 16-bit, write-only register, organized from bit 15 through bit 0, as follows:
Bit 15: Interrupt Enable bit -- this bit will be reset whenever the logic section 62 (Figures 10A-10O) or the computer processor 34 (Figure 2) initializes the system. Otherwise, it is set/reset by the computer programs (software) 36. This bit is actually generated -- in the preferred embodiment -- by flip-flop 1402 in Figure 11G.
Figure imgf000114_0001
Bit 14: A "single step" bit provided to the ADC in converter 56 (Figure 2). This bit is generated -- in the preferred embodiment -- by flip-flop 1437 and results in generation of signal CMPSAMP (via data bit DAL14 of Figure 11G), which is one of the signals which generates SAMPLE (see Figure 6D), the latter being utilized (it will be recalled) in the analog-to-digital conversion process
(Figure 6A). Bit 13: A Go bit, which is provided (at input
DOUT13) to the arrangement of Figure 10 J so as to cause generation of signal 5MSSAMP, calls for the generation of data at the rate of one sample point (six channels) every 5 milliseconds. It will be recalled that DOUT13 turns on flip-flop 970, triggering one-shot 978, so as to generate 5MSSAMP.
Bit 12: A Flash bit is provided, as input DOUT12 (CMPSHTR), to flip-flop 1022 of Figure 10L, so as to generate output SHUT, resulting in pulsing of the flasher 70. Bit 11: A 2.5 Millisecond Sample bit is provided as input DOUTH to flip-flop 972 of Figure 10J. Flip-flop 972 accordingly -- via its Q output -- enables relay (solenoid/switch) 982, so as to adjust the timing of one-shot 980. As a result, the sampling time is decreased from 5 milliseconds to 2.5 milliseconds.
Bit 10: A bit DOUT10 is provided to flip-flop 1020 of Figure 10L, to set that flip-flop. As a result, flip-flop 1020 -- via its Q output -- generates output RECORDING. When RECORDING goes "low," display indicator DS9 of Figures 9A and 9B is illuminated thus indicating that the system is in the "recording" mode of operation. Bit 9: A Copy bit, which causes the hard-copy printer 40 (Figure 2) to make a printout of test results. Bits 8-0: Bits 5-8 are "spare" bits available for use in accomplishing other functions or display indications, as would be judged by one of ordinary skill in the art to be necessary with respect to the CEOG system. Furthermore, bits 0-4 -- it will be noted -- are stored in latch circuit 1254 of Figure 11C as written thereinto by STROBO. Thus, these bits may be read back by the computer processor 34 through tristate buffer 1253, as enabled by STROBl. This affords the user of the CEOG system with an advantageous test capability for testing the timing in interface 30 (Figure 2), and as well with a test capability for error-testing of data passing through the computer bus via the interface 30. The status word register is a 16-bit, read-only register, organized from bit 15 through bit 0, as follows:
Bit 15: A Write Busy bit, which must be checked before the computer writes a word into any of the registers (except for the control register). If bit 15 is "on," this indicates that the CEOG system is involved in storing a word transmitted by the computer processor 34 (Figure 2) during the last "write" command. In the preferred embodiment, bit 15 is provided by flip-flop 1437 of Figure 11G. It is to be noted that output
Figure imgf000117_0001
of flip-flop 1437 becomes computer input DAT15 via tristate buffer 1253 of Figure 11C. Bit 14: A Stripe-On bit indicating that the stripe cage 76 in optokinetic device 16 is turning. This bit is generated by switch Sll (Figures 9A and 9C) -- when turned on by the operator -- and is provided to the computer processor 34 -- via NAND gate 912, inverter 918, NAND gate 924 and inverter 928 of portion L4 of Figure 10H -- as input DATIN14.
Bit 13: A Stripe Right bit, indicating that the stripe cage 76 is rotating rightward (bit 13 = 1) or leftward (bit 13 = 0). Bit 12: A Copy Busy bit, indicating that the hard-copy printer 40 (Figure 1) is busy printing from the last command.
Bits 11-0: These bits are indicated as spare bits, but can be utilized for providing various other control functions/display indicators as would be obvious to one of ordinary skill in the art.
The Data-in registers are made up of the above-specified (Table 2) I/O addresses, which correspond to respective channels 1-8 of information. As will be recalled from the discussion of the ADC circuitry (Figure 6A), digital channel 1 (responding to analog input AMPOUTl) contains left vertical eye movement test data, channel 2 contains right vertical eye movement test data, channel 3 contains left horizontal eye movement test data, channel 4 contains right horizontal eye movement test data, channels 5 and 6 contain VER test data, channel 7 (corresponding to analog input TACH2) contains chair speed data, and channel 8 (corresponding to analog input STRIPESPD) contains cage speed test data. Data Out channels 1-8 (referred to in Table 2 above) include digital data 'from the computer processor 34 of Figure 2 for conversion in converter stage 56. Specifically, channels 1-4 of the Data Out channels comprise digital data for deriving analog signals BIASN (N = 1, 2,..., 6) -- see Figure 6E -- for use in developing zero-adjustment signals ZRADJ (J = 1, 2,..., 6). Discussion of channels 5-8 is eliminated as not being critical to the full disclosure of this invention; however, it will be obvious to one of ordinary skill in the art that channels 5-8 could be utilized for the development of various other analog functions.
The Move X register (referred to in Table 2) is a 16-bit, write-only register, organized (in the preferred embodiment) as follows: Bit 10: Go X mirror -- instructs the mirrors 14 (and associated driving circuitry) to begin scanning in the X direction with its own sine wave. See input DOUT10 to flip-flop 1020 in Figure 10L, resulting in generation of XSINE. Bit 11: The CMPSINE bit which instructs the mirrors 14 that the computer processor 34 is to control the X deflection of the mirrors 14 so that the 10 least significant bits of the MOVX register are in control of operation of the X-deflection mirrors. See input DOUTH (CMPSINE) to flip-flop 1021 in Figure 10L, and resultant generation of CMPSINE by inverter 1034. Bit 12: The CMPSHTR bit which opens the shutter 66 (Figure 2) to allow the light from laser 12 to pass therethrough, usually used in conjunction with bits 10 or 11 above. See input DOUT12 (CMPSHTR) applied to flip-flop 1022 in Figure 10L, with resultant generation of SHUT by NPN transistor 1036. Bit 13: YSCAN bit which causes the Y-deflection mirrors to scan -- similar to Bit 10 except that it controls scanning in the Y direction. See input YSCAN to amplifier 1110 in Figure 10M, with subsequent generation of mirror driving output YDRIVE. It is to be noted that, in the preferred embodiment, when Bits 10 and 13 are simultaneously on, mirror scanning in a 45 degree direction (that is, along a line with a slope of one) can be achieved. Bits 0-9: These 10 bits are provided by the processor 34 -- via interface 30 -- to converter stage 56 (Figure 2). Specifically, in the preferred embodiment, bits 0-9 are provided as inputs DTOA0-DTOA9 to circuitry of the type illustrated as DAC circuitry 300 of Figure 6E, the data being strobed into latch circuits 302 and 303 by a strobe input STROBMX (similar to STROBN) . Therein, the digital data is digital- to-analog converted to develop analog output MOVX (similar to BIASN of Figure 6E), thus providing an analog voltage (preferably, having a value of from -5 volts (000...000) to +5 volts
(111...111)) defining desired movement of the X mirrors of mirrors 14 (Figure 2) . Position X register (referred to in Table 2) is a read-only register which feeds back (to the computer processor 34 of Figure 2) information relative to the position of the X-scaiming mirrors 14. The 10 least significant bits of this register give the relative X position of the mirrors. However, in the preferrred embodiment, either the Go bit or the single-step bit (both of which were referred to above) must be turned on, and an interrupt received, before the 10 least significant bits of the Position X register contain up-to-date data. (This is true of all the outputs of A/D converters 56' of Figure 6A).
The Move Y register is a write-only register used for controlling scanning of the mirrors 14 in the Y direction. The 10 least significant bits (0-9) of this register are D/A converted -- in the same manner as described above for bits 0-10 controlling X direction scanning -- to form MOVY, an analog voltage which operates in conjunction with the Y position potentiometer (under the control of the operator) -- see Figures 9A-9E -- to move the Y-deflection mirrors. See potentiometer 504 in circuit 502 of Figure 9C.
Position Y register is a read-only register, the 10 least significant bits of which give the relative Y position of the mirrors 14. As was the case with the Postion X register, either the Go bit or the single-step bit must be on, and an interrupt received, before the 10 least significant bits of the Position Y register have up-to-date data contained therein. Finally, with reference to the above discussion, the CEOG system address decoding scheme is set forth in Table 3 (below). It is to be noted that, in the preferred embodiment, memory locations 164,000 through 164,176 are not true memory locations in processor 34 (Figure 2). Rather, locations 164,000-164,016 include the control word register, status word register, and chair control register, and addressing of these locations is accomplished by the decoding NAND gate 1274, decoders 1316, 1318, etc. of Figure 11D (previously described) which produce STROB0, STROB1, etc. to send data to the proper address.
In a similar manner, locations 164,020-164,036 are channels 1-8 of data input from the CEOG system to the processor 34, such data input being, of course, analog-to-digital converted prior to input. Locations 164,040-164,056 are channels 1-8 of data output from the processor 34 to the CEOG system, such data output being, of course, digital-to-analog converted after output.
Figure imgf000124_0001
Finally, locations 164,060-164,076 are the Move X register, Position X register, Move Y register, and Position Y register (previously discussed above).
Thus, in the preferred embodiment, much of the circuitry described in Figures 11A through 11G above act as, or perform the functions of, locations 164,000-164,076. Thus, a "1" deposited in bit 12 of address 164,000 will cause the flasher 70 (Figure 2) to flash. This bit will be reset after the flash occurs (as previously described above).
Referring to Table 3, address. data bits D6-D0 represent the seven least significant bits of a data address for addressing any one of the locations 164,000-164,076. It is to be noted that since, in the preferred embodiment, only alternate locations
(164,000; 164,002; etc.) are utilized, bit D0 can be dropped in terms of the octai decoding of bits D6-D0. Thus, bits D6-D1 correspond to address line inputs DAL6-DAL1 provided as data address line inputs
Figure imgf000125_0001
provided by the computer bus to bus transceiver devices 1240-1243 of Figure 11B (discussed above), and further correspond to inputs ADDR6-ADDR1 provided to decoders 1316 and 1381 of Figure HB (also discussed above). As a result of octal decoding (in decoders such as previously mentioned), various groups of strobe signals GRPOSTB, GRPISTB, GRP2STB and GRP3STB (as shown in Table 3) are developed -- specifically, STROBO-STROB7, STROB10-STROB17, STROB20-STROB27 and STROB30-STROB37. As mentioned earlier, the CEOG system of Figure 2 includes a processor 34 which is preferably software-controlled by computer programs 36. As also mentioned earlier, computer programs 36 preferably use the RT-11 software package (provided by Digital Equipment Corporation for use with the preferred processor unit PDP11/03).
Figures 12A and 12B are general flowcharts of the test program and analysis program, respectively, implemented by the processor 34 of the CEOG system of Figure 2, as a preferred implementation of computer programs 36. That is, computer programs 36 of Figure 2 are divided into a Run program (Figure 12A) by means of which various selected tests are performed on the patient, and an Analysis program (Figure 12B) by means of which the test results are analyzed/processed and a display or hard copy of the test results in a convenient format is provided to the test administrator. Prior to discussion of Figures 12A and 12B, a few additional introductory comments are appropriate. In the preferred embodiment of the CEOG system of the present invention, there are three processes: test, analysis and review. Specifically, RUN TEST calls up the test process for presenting the stimulus to the patient and recording the patient's reaction; RUN ANALYSIS calls up the analysis process, by which the patient's reaction is analyzed and recorded on the patient's record; and RUN REVIEW calls up the review process, by which the patient's record is reviewed, a directory of patients processed can be displayed, and a hard copy replication of the patient's records can be made. As would be obvious to one of ordinary skill in the art, the processor 34 is preferably programmed to provide the operator (test administrator) with the capacility of choosing which of the three processes (test, analysis or review) to enter by means of entry of an appropriate alphabetical character (e.g., T, A or R) on the keyboard 44 (Figure 2). Referring to Figure 12A, presuming that the test process has been selected, such test process will be commenced by loading the system and data disks, and "booting" the system -- block 1500 of Figure 12A. The present data (such as the present date) is then entered into the computer's file record -- block 1501. The test process is formally commenced by starting the system (e.g., by typing RUN SYS on the keyboard 44 of Figure 2) -- block 1502. A display of a patient data form on display device 38 (Figure 2) will then occur -- block 1503. The test administrator then enters various patient information (such as name, ID, etc.) onto the data form from the keyboard 44 -- block 1504.
Upon completion of patient data input, the system displays a test menu -- block 1505 -- such as the following:
P = pursuit test C = chair motion test V = visual evoked response (VER) test R = return to the CEOG system
Upon selection of the pursuit test -- block 1507 -- a pursuit test menu is then presented, as follows:
C = calibration F = fixed target J = jumping target
M = moving target R = rotating patterns S = recall test type menu Presuming selection of the calibration procedure -- block 1510 -- the test administrator then commences a calibration procedure. Such calibration procedure is predetermined in accordance with the particular calibration regimen dictated by the programming of the processor 34 via computer programs 36. For example, in the preferred embodiment, such calibration procedure is as follows:
1. Perform auto-zero adjustment; type C when completed.
2. Calibration continued -- perform horizontal 15° left calibration; type C when completed. 3. Calibration continued ~ perform auto-zero; type C when completed.
4. Calibration completed -- perform horizontal 15° right calibration; type C when completed.
5. Calibration continued -- perform auto-zero; type C when completed.
6. Calibration continued -- perform vertical 8° up calibration; type C when completed.
7. Calibration continued -- perform auto-zero; type C when completed. 8. Calibration continued -- perform vertical 8° down calibration; type C when completed. 9. Calibration completed -- computer returns to pursuit menu. Presuming that the test administrator chooses the fixed target test -- block 1511 -- the fixed target test will be administered under control of the processor 34 and computer programs 36. In the preferred embodiment, instructions for administration of the fixed target test are as follows: E = recall pursuit menu.
To record test results, push Space Bar to start, push again to stop.
T = time scale -- follow with 5, 7.5, 10. 12:5, 15, 17.5 or 20 seconds -- otherwise time scale is 2.5 seconds.
A = auto-zero; push C when completed. O = eyes open; push carriage return to stop.
C = eyes closed; push carriage return to stop.
Presuming operator selection of the jumping target test -- block 1512 -- the preferred procedure is as follows:
E = recall pursuit menu. To record, push Space Bar to start, push again to stop.
T = time scale: follow with 5, 7.5, 10, 12.5, 15, 17.5 or 20 seconds; otherwise, time scale is 2.5 seconds.
A = auto-zero; push C when completed. H = horizontal; push carriage return to stop. V = vertical; push carriage return to stop.
FH = 50 spots horizontal. FV = 50 spots vertical. Presuming selection of the moving target test -- block 1513 -- the preferred test procedure is as follows:
E = recall pursuit menu. To record, push Space Bar to start, push again to stop.
T = time scale: follow with 5, 7.5, 10, 12.5, 15, 17.5 or 20 seconds; otherwise, time scale is 2.5 seconds.
To choose period, turn potentiometer adjustment knob (horizontal speed adjustment knob P3 to Figure 9A). Choose test: push carriage return to stop. A = auto-zero; push C when completed. HT = horizontal, triangle. HS = horizontal, sine. VT = vertical, triangle.
VS = vertical, sine. Presuming selection of the rotating patterns test -- block 1514 -- the preferred procedure is as follows: E = recall pursuit menu. To record: push Space Bar to start, push again to stop.
T = time scale: follow with 5, 7.5, 10, 12.5, 15, 17.5 or 20 seconds; otherwise, time scale is 2.5 seconds. Lower rotating drum (by operator control section 450 of Figure 9A).
To choose rotation speed, turn potentiometer adjustment knob (P2 in Figure 9A) .
P = perform rotating pattern test, to stop push carriage return.
TP = perform three revolutions of the drum for the pattern test.
If the test administrator chooses the chair motion test -- block 1508 -- either rotation of the chair (block 1515) or oscillation of the chair (1516) can be selected. The preferred procedure is as follows: C = calibration. R = rotate chair right or left. C = oscillate chair four cycles. F = rotate chair with fixation light.
S = recall test type menu. For rotation of the chair -- block 1515 -- the procedure is preferably as follows:
E = recall chair motion menu. To record: push Space Bar to start, push again to stop.
T = time scale: follow with 5, 7.5, 10, 12.5, 15, 17.5 or 20 seconds; otherwise, time scale is 2.5 seconds.
Set rotation speed selection knob (potentiometer adjustment knob P1 of Figure 9A). To set number of rotations, type N followed by any number from 1 through 14. A = auto-zero; push C when completed.
R = rotate.chair right: take horizontal data at end.
L = rotate chair left: take horizontal data at end. RHV = rotate chair right: take horizontal and vertical data at end.
LHV = rotate chair left: take horizontal and vertical data at end. It is to be noted, that, in the chair rotation test, data may be taken during rotation and also after the chair has stopped.
Presuming that oscillation -- block 1516 -- has been chosen, the chair will be automatically oscillated for four cycles, and data will be taken during chair motion. The procedure is preferably as follows:
E = recall chair motion menu. To record: push Space Bar to start, push again to stop.
T = time scale: follow with 5, 7.5, 10, 12.5, 15, 17.5 or 20 seconds; otherwise, time scale is 2.5 seconds.
Set rotation speed selector knob to "oscillate"' position.
A = auto-zero; push C when completed. T = perform test. As indicated above, during the rotation test -- block 1515 -- the operator can designate rotation with use of a fixation light, with data being derived during chair rotation. The preferable procedure is the same as stated with respect to oscillation of the chair (immediately above), with one exception: change "Set rotation speed selector knob to 'oscillate' position" to the following: Position fixation light (via switches S9 and
S10 of Figure 9A) and turn the light on.
Set rotation speed selector knob to "fixation light" position.
Presuming selection of the visual evoked response (VER) test -- block 1509 -- the preferable procedure is as follows:
Blinking letter (on display 38 of Figure 2) indicates next test to be done in the normal VER sequence. B8 = both eyes open, 128 flashes, one per second.
B4 = both eyes open, 64 flashes, one per second.
R4 = right eye occluded, 64 flashes, one per second.
L4 = left eye occluded, 64 flashes, one per second.
T(f,r) = test VER using number of flashes f (f is 16, 32, 64 or 128) and flashes per second r (r is 1/2, 1 or 2).
M(m) = on display, choose magnification factor m.
REC = record the display. S = recall test type menu. To summarize the above, it is to be noted that in each instance, the particular test or group of tests selected by the test administrator is automatically administered to the patient under control of the processor 34/software 36 of Figure 2. Specifically, whereas manual or semi-automatic systems of the prior art called for the test administrator to manipulate the various test devices in accordance with a prescribed procedure for each test (typically, as set forth in a bulky and inconvenient instruction manual), the system of the present invention provides for truly automated test administration, in that the above-listed instructions (for each test) are sequentially displayed on display device 38 (Figure 2). A bare minimum of information is then required from the test administrator, and such information is entered by the administrator utilizing the keyboard 44. Moreover, in the case where the test administrator is required by the test program to provide parameters (such as chair rotation speed via potentiometer adjustment knob PI of Figure 9A, etc.) such information can be very quickly and efficiently set by utilization of the integrated operator control section 450 illustrated in Figure 9A. By virtue of this automated test administration utilizing an integrated CEOG system, the administration of pursuit tests, chair motion tests and visual evoked response (VER) tests - which previously were relatively inefficient in their administration -- can be very quickly and efficiently performed. The end result is, of course, that a larger number of patients can be treated by utilization of the integrated CEOG system of the present invention. Moreover, the integrated CEOG system of the present invention is highly flexible in that, as previously discussed and described in great detail above, the test administrator always has the option of manually administering one or more of the particular tests by manipulation of the various controls in operator control section 450 of Figure 9A. Finally, in either mode of operation -- automated or manual test administration -- immediate display of the test results, in a graphical format readily usable by the attending test administrator or physician, is provided (as illustrated on display device 38 of Figure 1). By providing the test administrator or attending physician with immediate display of useful test results, the administrator or physician is able to: (1) determine immediately if the test has been properly administered, (2) determine whether or not the patient has validly received/reacted to the test stimuli presented, and (3) thus, determine whether further testing (or repeated testing) is necessary.
The analysis program of the software 36 of Figure 1 will now be described with reference to Figure 12B. Upon commencement of the analysis program (see START block 1540), the following steps are taken:
Header information is read from the disk 42 (Figure 1) -- block 1550.
Header information is displayed -- block 1551.
A message "Is this the correct disk?" is printed out -- block 1552.
Operator enters a Y (for "yes") or N (for "no") -- block 1553. If "no," the system obtains the correct disk -- block 1554 -- and returns to block 1550.
If "yes," the system prints the message "enter record number" -- block 1555. The operator enters the record number "N" -- block 1556.
N is compared to zero (block 1557); then, if N is equal to or greater than zero, the Nth record is obtained from the disk (block 1559), while if N is less than zero, a further decision (block 1558) is made. Specifically, if -1 is equal to or less than N, the system returns to START (block 1550), while if -1 is greater than N, the system stops. Once the Nth record from disk is obtained
(block 1559), the system displays the type and. mode information -- block 1560.
Decision as to whether or not a VER test has been performed is made -- block 1561. If VER -- block 1562 -- the system displays two channels with labels and scaling -- block 1563 -- and enters a "print" routine (to be subsequently discussed).
If not VER, data is normalized using calibration results -- block 1564.
Four channels with labels and scales are then displayed -- block 1565.
Then, if the test is a pursuit test, mirror position (H or V) is displayed, while if chair rotation is called for, chair motor speed is displayed -- block 1566 -- and the "print" routine is entered. In the print routine, the following procedure applies: The "group size" is printed -- block 1567. The operator then enters N = 1, 2, 3 as the group size -- block 1558.
At this point, the print routine would be entered if the test question was a VER test (see discussion above). The system prints the message "position point and its disposition" -- block 1569.
The system displays a cursor -- block 1570.
The operator enters one of three alphabetic characters: S, E or F -- block 1571.
If S is entered, the coordinates (previously entered) are saved -- block 1572.
Then, a determination as to group size is made -- block 1573. If group size equals 1, the system prints the message "enter label" (block 1574), the operator enters a character (block 1575), the system displays the label so entered (block 1576 ) , and the system returns to "display cursor" (block 1570).
If the group size is 2 or 3 (block 1573 ), a decision as to whether or not the group is completed is made -- block 1577.
If the group is completed, the next group is initiated (block 1577), and then a return to "display cursor" (block 1570) is executed.
If the group is not completed, a return to "display cursor" (block 1570) is immediately executed. If the operator enters E (in block 1571), section information is saved, and initiate next section is executed -- block 1579 -- the system returning to "display cursor" (block 1570).
If the operator enters F (in block 1571), the channel information is saved, and initiate next channel is executed -- block 1580 -- followed by a decision (block 1581) as to whether the channel is less than, equal to or greater than 4. If the channel is equal to or less than 4, a return to "display cursor" (block 1570) is executed.
On the other hand, if the channel is greater than 4, the system computes and displays times and velocities (block 1582), and prints the message "save?" (block 1583).
Then, the operator enters Y ("yes") or N ("no") -- block 1584. If "no," the system returns to "display cursor" (block 1570), while if "yes," the system writes this record to disk (block 1585), and then returns to "display cursor" (block 1570). The Test program of Figure 12A and Analysis program of Figure 12B are implemented by various computer programs 36 (Figure 1) -- preferably, a master control program, individual test programs for the respective EOG and VER tests, and individual main analysis programs for the respective EOG and VER tests. More specifically, the computer programs 36 of
Figure 1 are implemented, in the preferred embodiment, by the following: a master control and stored format (for printout) program; a program for calling forms for display; an EOG test program; a VER test program; a main analysis program (for EOG test analysis); a main analysis program (for VER test analysis); and a display program. Numerous modifications and adaptations of the system of the invention will be apparent to those skilled in the art and thus it is intended by the appended claims to cover all such modifications and adaptations which fall within the true spirit and scope of the invention.

Claims

CLAIMS 1. An integrated medical testing system for automated administration of test stimuli to a patient, comprising: operator control means responsive to operator selection of a desired stimuli to be administered to said patient for providing processor input signals corresponding to said selection; processor means responsive to said processor input signals from said operator control means for generating control signals indicating said desired stimuli to be administered; and stimulation control means responsive to said control signals from said processor means for automatically administering said stimuli to said patient; said system further comprising a rotatable chair, said stimulation control means comprising a motor controller responsive to said control signals from said processor means for rotating said rotatable chair so as to administer said stimuli to said patient; wherein said control signals include rotation signals commanding rotation of said rotatable chair for a given number of turns, said motor controller being responsive thereto for rotating said rotatable chair through said given number of turns, and then stopping said rotation of said rotatable chair.
2. The system of claim 1, wherein said control signals include a stop signal commanding stopping of said rotation of said rotatable chair, said motor controller being responsive thereto for stopping said rotation of said rotatable chair.
3. The system of claim 1, wherein said motor controller rotates said chair in a first direction, and said control signals include automatic reverse signals commanding automatic reversal of the direction of rotation of said rotatable chair after a given number of turns, said motor controller being responsive thereto for stopping said rotation of said rotatable chair after said given number of turns, and for rotating said rotatable chair in a second direction, opposite to said first direction, for said given number of turns.
4. The system of claim 1, wherein said motor controller issues status signals, said status signals being transmitted to said processor means, whereby to apprise said processor means of said status of said rotatable chair.
5. The system of claim 4, wherein said status signals include a completion-of-turn signal indicating completion of a rotation of said rotatable chair.
6. The system of claim 4, wherein said rotatable chair has a desired initial position, and said status signals include a position indication signal indicating alternatively non-variation or variation of said rotatable chair from said desired initial position.
7. The system of claim 1, said operator control means being responsive to operator selection of a desired speed of rotation of said rotatable chair for issuing speed control signals indicating said desired speed of rotation of said rotatable chair, said stimulation control means comprising a motor controller responsive to said speed control signals for controllably rotating said rotatable chair at said desired speed of rotation.
8. The system of claim 1, further comprising scanning light source means for generating a scanning light, said stimulation control means being responsive to said control signals from said processor means for controlling said scanning light source means to generate said scanning light.
9. The system of claim 1, further comprising flasher light means for generating a flashing light, said stimulation control means controlling said flasher light means to generate said flashing light.
10. The system of claim 1, further comprising optokinetic device means for generating optokinetic test stimuli, said stimulation control means controlling said optokinetic device means to generate said optokinetic test stimuli.
11. An integrated medical testing system for automated administration of test stimuli to a patient, comprising: operator control means responsive to operator selection of a desired stimuli to be administered to said patient for providing processor input signals corresponding to said selection; processor means responsive to said processor input signals from said operator control means for generating control signals indicating said desired stimuli to be administered; and stimulation control means responsive to said control signals from said processor means for automatically administering said stimuli to said patient; said system further comprising scanning light source means for generating a scanning light comprising said desired stimuli to be administered, said stimulation control means being responsive to said control signals from said processor means for controlling said scanning light source means to generate said scanning light, said stimulation control means generating status signals indicating the status of said scanning as generated by said scanning light source means.
12. An integrated medical testing system for automated administration of test stimuli to a patient, comprising: operator control means responsive to operator selection of a desired stimuli to be administered to said patient for providing processor input signals corresponding to said selection; processor means responsive to said processor input signals from said operator control means for generating control signals indicating said desired stimuli to be administered; and stimulation control means responsive to said control signals from said processor means for automatically administering said stimuli to said patient; said system further comprising flasher light means for generating a flashing light comprising said desired stimuli to be administered, said stimulation control means controlling said flasher light means to generate said flashing light; wherein said flasher light means comprises a flasher, said operator selection of said desired stimuli comprising operator-commanding the lowering of said flasher into a position in front of said patient, said flasher light means further comprising a motor for lowering said flasher in response thereto.
13. An integrated medical testing system for automated administration of test stimuli to a patient comprising: operator control means responsive to operator selection of a desired stimuli to be administered to said patient for providing processor input signals corresponding to said selection; processor means responsive to said processor input signals from said operator control means for generating control signals indicating said desired stimuli to be administered; and stimulation control means responsive to said control signals from said processor means for automatically administering said stimuli to said patient; said system further comprising optokinetic device means for generating optokinetic test stimuli, said stimulation control means controlling said optokinetic device means to generate said optokinetic test stimuli; wherein said optokinetic device means comprises a stripe cage and a motor, said operator selection of said desired stimuli comprising operator-commanding the lowering of said stripe cage to a position in the vicinity of said patient, said motor lowering said optokinetic device in response thereto.
PCT/US1982/000343 1982-03-22 1982-03-22 Computerized electro-oculographic (ceog) system WO1983003341A1 (en)

Priority Applications (2)

Application Number Priority Date Filing Date Title
PCT/US1982/000343 WO1983003341A1 (en) 1982-03-22 1982-03-22 Computerized electro-oculographic (ceog) system
EP19820901258 EP0104166A4 (en) 1982-03-22 1982-03-22 Computerized electro-oculographic(ceog)system.

Applications Claiming Priority (1)

Application Number Priority Date Filing Date Title
PCT/US1982/000343 WO1983003341A1 (en) 1982-03-22 1982-03-22 Computerized electro-oculographic (ceog) system

Publications (1)

Publication Number Publication Date
WO1983003341A1 true WO1983003341A1 (en) 1983-10-13

Family

ID=22167873

Family Applications (1)

Application Number Title Priority Date Filing Date
PCT/US1982/000343 WO1983003341A1 (en) 1982-03-22 1982-03-22 Computerized electro-oculographic (ceog) system

Country Status (2)

Country Link
EP (1) EP0104166A4 (en)
WO (1) WO1983003341A1 (en)

Cited By (12)

* Cited by examiner, † Cited by third party
Publication number Priority date Publication date Assignee Title
FR2722388A1 (en) * 1994-07-15 1996-01-19 Centre National De La Recherche DEVICE FOR EXAMINING A SUBJECT, IN PARTICULAR ITS POTENTIAL VESTIBULAR EVENTS
WO1999009881A1 (en) * 1997-08-22 1999-03-04 Massachusetts Institute Of Technology Apparatus and method for measuring vestibular ocular reflex function
FR2803764A1 (en) * 2000-01-18 2001-07-20 Laurent Garin Device for treating vertigo or other equilibrium problems by training a patient by standing him or her on a rotating platform and subjecting him to opto-kinetic stimuli while rotating the platform
WO2002091982A1 (en) * 2001-05-16 2002-11-21 Robatel S.A. Therapeutic device for dizziness and equilibrium disorders
ES2257899A1 (en) * 2003-07-29 2006-08-01 Universitat De Les Illes Balears Electrooculographic signal processing system, has unit for amplification of electrooculographic signal, filtrate unit, electrooculographic signal control unit and digitalization unit, where control unit includes adjuster of offset
EP2486864A3 (en) * 2006-05-19 2013-02-20 Ethicon Endo-Surgery, Inc. Electrically powered surgical instrument
US8573459B2 (en) 2006-05-19 2013-11-05 Ethicon Endo-Surgery, Inc Optimal tissue compression electrical surgical instrument
US8627995B2 (en) 2006-05-19 2014-01-14 Ethicon Endo-Sugery, Inc. Electrically self-powered surgical instrument with cryptographic identification of interchangeable part
US9183756B2 (en) 2007-11-26 2015-11-10 Ultrathera Technologies, Inc. Vestibular stimulation systems and methods of use
US9554803B2 (en) 2005-07-26 2017-01-31 Ethicon Endo-Surgery, Llc Electrically self-powered surgical instrument with manual release
US9662116B2 (en) 2006-05-19 2017-05-30 Ethicon, Llc Electrically self-powered surgical instrument with cryptographic identification of interchangeable part
US10314583B2 (en) 2005-07-26 2019-06-11 Ethicon Llc Electrically self-powered surgical instrument with manual release

Citations (7)

* Cited by examiner, † Cited by third party
Publication number Priority date Publication date Assignee Title
US3000271A (en) * 1958-10-27 1961-09-19 Salmon C Harvey Mechanics of a method for the inducing and recording the phenomena known as nystagmus, caused by stimulation of either or both labyrinths, portions of the balancing mechanism of the human body
US3258008A (en) * 1961-12-12 1966-06-28 Vulliet-Durand Jacques Rotary seat for medical purposes
US3498288A (en) * 1966-02-22 1970-03-03 Commissariat Energie Atomique Device for correcting the measurement of potentials detected by contact electrodes
US3623477A (en) * 1969-04-15 1971-11-30 Robert L Trent Biomedical sensing and display apparatus
US3716046A (en) * 1971-04-27 1973-02-13 Tracoustics Inc Apparatus and method for rotationally inducing and measuring nystagmus
US3946723A (en) * 1974-12-05 1976-03-30 Instrumentation & Control Systems, Inc. Electrode switching adapter for vertical recording of electronystagmographs
US4216781A (en) * 1978-06-26 1980-08-12 Roy John E Methods of electrophysiological testing

Family Cites Families (2)

* Cited by examiner, † Cited by third party
Publication number Priority date Publication date Assignee Title
US3969020A (en) * 1973-12-28 1976-07-13 Giles C. Clegg, Jr. Automatic refraction apparatus and method
FR2471769B1 (en) * 1979-12-20 1984-11-30 Inst Nat Sante Rech Med STIMULATION DEVICE FOR EXAMINING THE VISUAL FIELD

Patent Citations (7)

* Cited by examiner, † Cited by third party
Publication number Priority date Publication date Assignee Title
US3000271A (en) * 1958-10-27 1961-09-19 Salmon C Harvey Mechanics of a method for the inducing and recording the phenomena known as nystagmus, caused by stimulation of either or both labyrinths, portions of the balancing mechanism of the human body
US3258008A (en) * 1961-12-12 1966-06-28 Vulliet-Durand Jacques Rotary seat for medical purposes
US3498288A (en) * 1966-02-22 1970-03-03 Commissariat Energie Atomique Device for correcting the measurement of potentials detected by contact electrodes
US3623477A (en) * 1969-04-15 1971-11-30 Robert L Trent Biomedical sensing and display apparatus
US3716046A (en) * 1971-04-27 1973-02-13 Tracoustics Inc Apparatus and method for rotationally inducing and measuring nystagmus
US3946723A (en) * 1974-12-05 1976-03-30 Instrumentation & Control Systems, Inc. Electrode switching adapter for vertical recording of electronystagmographs
US4216781A (en) * 1978-06-26 1980-08-12 Roy John E Methods of electrophysiological testing

Cited By (35)

* Cited by examiner, † Cited by third party
Publication number Priority date Publication date Assignee Title
FR2722388A1 (en) * 1994-07-15 1996-01-19 Centre National De La Recherche DEVICE FOR EXAMINING A SUBJECT, IN PARTICULAR ITS POTENTIAL VESTIBULAR EVENTS
WO1996002186A1 (en) * 1994-07-15 1996-02-01 Centre National De La Recherche Scientifique Device for examining a patient and, in particular, determining his or her vestibular evoked potentials
US5983128A (en) * 1994-07-15 1999-11-09 Centre National De La Recherche Scientifique Device for examining a subject and, in particular, determining his or her vestibular evoked potentials
WO1999009881A1 (en) * 1997-08-22 1999-03-04 Massachusetts Institute Of Technology Apparatus and method for measuring vestibular ocular reflex function
US5942954A (en) * 1997-08-22 1999-08-24 Massachusetts Institute Of Technology Apparatus and method for measuring vestibular ocular reflex function
WO2001052786A1 (en) * 2000-01-18 2001-07-26 Robatel Sa Rehabilitation device with turning platform for treating dizziness and disorders affecting equilibrium
FR2803764A1 (en) * 2000-01-18 2001-07-20 Laurent Garin Device for treating vertigo or other equilibrium problems by training a patient by standing him or her on a rotating platform and subjecting him to opto-kinetic stimuli while rotating the platform
WO2002091982A1 (en) * 2001-05-16 2002-11-21 Robatel S.A. Therapeutic device for dizziness and equilibrium disorders
FR2824742A1 (en) * 2001-05-16 2002-11-22 Laurent Garin Therapeutic apparatus for treating vertigo and balance disorders has rotary horizontal platform and screen in form of portion of sphere
ES2257899A1 (en) * 2003-07-29 2006-08-01 Universitat De Les Illes Balears Electrooculographic signal processing system, has unit for amplification of electrooculographic signal, filtrate unit, electrooculographic signal control unit and digitalization unit, where control unit includes adjuster of offset
US11172930B2 (en) 2005-07-26 2021-11-16 Cilag Gmbh International Electrically self-powered surgical instrument with manual release
US10314583B2 (en) 2005-07-26 2019-06-11 Ethicon Llc Electrically self-powered surgical instrument with manual release
US9554803B2 (en) 2005-07-26 2017-01-31 Ethicon Endo-Surgery, Llc Electrically self-powered surgical instrument with manual release
US8844791B2 (en) 2006-05-19 2014-09-30 Ethicon Endo-Surgery, Inc. Electrical surgical instrument with optimal tissue compression
US9687234B2 (en) 2006-05-19 2017-06-27 Ethicon L.L.C. Electrical surgical instrument with optimized power supply and drive
US8627995B2 (en) 2006-05-19 2014-01-14 Ethicon Endo-Sugery, Inc. Electrically self-powered surgical instrument with cryptographic identification of interchangeable part
US8573459B2 (en) 2006-05-19 2013-11-05 Ethicon Endo-Surgery, Inc Optimal tissue compression electrical surgical instrument
US12096933B2 (en) 2006-05-19 2024-09-24 Cllag GmbH International Electrical surgical instrument with differential rate of closing motion speed
US9439651B2 (en) 2006-05-19 2016-09-13 Ethicon Endo-Surgery, Llc Methods for cryptographic identification of interchangeable parts for surgical instruments
EP2486872A3 (en) * 2006-05-19 2013-03-06 Ethicon Endo-Surgery, Inc. Surgical instrument and method for post-termination braking of a motor in an electrically powered surgical instrument
US9622744B2 (en) 2006-05-19 2017-04-18 Ethicon Endo-Surgery, Llc Electrical surgical instrument with one-handed operation
US9662116B2 (en) 2006-05-19 2017-05-30 Ethicon, Llc Electrically self-powered surgical instrument with cryptographic identification of interchangeable part
US9675348B2 (en) 2006-05-19 2017-06-13 Ethicon Llc Electrical surgical instrument with knife return
US9681873B2 (en) 2006-05-19 2017-06-20 Ethicon Llc Electrical surgical stapling instrument with tissue compressive force control
US8573462B2 (en) 2006-05-19 2013-11-05 Ethicon Endo-Surgery, Inc. Electrical surgical instrument with optimized power supply and drive
US9713473B2 (en) 2006-05-19 2017-07-25 Ethicon Endo-Surgery, Inc. Active braking electrical surgical instrument and method for braking such an instrument
US9757127B2 (en) 2006-05-19 2017-09-12 Ethicon Llc Electrical surgical instrument with optimal tissue compression
US9901340B2 (en) 2006-05-19 2018-02-27 Ethicon Endo-Surgery, Inc. Active braking electrical surgical instrument and method for braking such an instrument
US10314592B2 (en) 2006-05-19 2019-06-11 Ethicon Llc Electrically self-powered surgical instrument with cryptographic identification of interchangeable part
EP2486871A3 (en) * 2006-05-19 2013-03-06 Ethicon Endo-Surgery, Inc. Surgical instrument and method for post-termination braking of a motor in a surgical instrument
US10675022B2 (en) 2006-05-19 2020-06-09 Ethicon Llc Electrical surgical instrument with optimal tissue compression
EP2486864A3 (en) * 2006-05-19 2013-02-20 Ethicon Endo-Surgery, Inc. Electrically powered surgical instrument
US11172931B2 (en) 2006-05-19 2021-11-16 Cilag Gmbh International Electrically self-powered surgical instrument with cryptographic identification of interchangeable part
US11759203B2 (en) 2006-05-19 2023-09-19 Cilag Gmbh International Electrical surgical instrument with minimum closure distance for staple firing control
US9183756B2 (en) 2007-11-26 2015-11-10 Ultrathera Technologies, Inc. Vestibular stimulation systems and methods of use

Also Published As

Publication number Publication date
EP0104166A1 (en) 1984-04-04
EP0104166A4 (en) 1986-03-04

Similar Documents

Publication Publication Date Title
US4474186A (en) Computerized electro-oculographic (CEOG) system with feedback control of stimuli
US4320768A (en) Computerized electro-oculographic (CEOG) system
WO1983003341A1 (en) Computerized electro-oculographic (ceog) system
Merchant et al. Remote measurement of eye direction allowing subject motion over one cubic foot of space
US6631990B2 (en) System for measuring distances in the anterior chamber of the eye
DE3878123T2 (en) DEVICE FOR Ophthalmology.
US3531642A (en) Thermographic scanner and recorder
US4429961A (en) Visual field testing device
Lindsey et al. Smooth-pursuit eye movements: a comparison of two measurement techniques for studying schizophrenia.
JP2000210259A (en) Method and apparatus for measurement of cornea shape
CN110384497B (en) Monitoring facilities of supplementary epileptic operation
CA1174359A (en) Computerized electro-oculographic (ceog) system
Gauthier et al. Two-dimensional eye movement monitor for clinical and laboratory recordings
JP3942965B2 (en) Ophthalmic equipment system
CN109091104B (en) Full-automatic integrated optometry equipment and optometry method thereof
US2482669A (en) Instrument having photoelectric cell and recording means for making eye measurements
CN211243361U (en) Electroencephalogram examination equipment for neurology department
Black et al. On-line electro-oculography
US2684671A (en) Dual ballistocardiographic apparatus
JPS58152536A (en) Computer type electric eye position drawing system
Landoll et al. Automation of data acquisition in patient testing
US4861155A (en) Method and apparatus for measuring curvature of the cornea
JP2733216B2 (en) Non-magnetic near reaction measurement method and apparatus
JPS63240834A (en) Ct scanner apparatus
JPH0327605Y2 (en)

Legal Events

Date Code Title Description
AL Designated countries for regional patents

Designated state(s): CH DE FR GB NL

WWE Wipo information: entry into national phase

Ref document number: 1982901258

Country of ref document: EP

WWP Wipo information: published in national office

Ref document number: 1982901258

Country of ref document: EP

WWW Wipo information: withdrawn in national office

Ref document number: 1982901258

Country of ref document: EP